* f> * a 1 aO 



ci. 






'in" V V , , , , % AT 



dL r ^«J 



W' 




•-■7 ^ ^, A N - 



A ,. * * o , V 

to « -£■ 




C ^r ft ' 



f% 





^ 



0' 



o* V 



v i * t 



/ ft 4 S s -o <• '\ o * 



w 




** 4 



s -0 




* . 



• o- 





'. "^ v* 



^ 






•^ rtf 



\ ■ 



£%. 




"«,V'*" f <* ' V o 



*«^w 






^ ^flB/ 



Colombo, Cris' 



PERSONAL NARRATIVE 



FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS 



FROM A MANUSCRIPT RE<?T&TLy/ DISCOVERED IN SPAIN. 




^r.mslatc^ front tfoc Spanish. 
5 



BOSTON : 
PUBLISHED BY THOMAS B. WAIT A8JD SON, 

&ND SOLD BY WAIT, GREENE AND CO. BOSTON*; (.. IND 

C. CARVILL/NEW-YORK, AND CAREY AND LEA, 

PHILADELPHIA. 









DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, TO WIT: 

District Clerk's Office. 
Be it Remembered, that on the twenty-ninth day of June, A. D. 
1827, in the fifty-first year of the Independence of the United States 
of America, Samuel Kettell, of the said District, has deposited in 
this office the title of a book, the right whereof he claims as Proprietor, 
n the words following to wit : 

" Personal Narrative of the First Voyage of Columbus to America. 
From a Manuscript recently discovered in Spain. Translated from (he 

Spanish." 

In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, en- 
titled, u An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the 
copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of 
such copies, during the times therein mentioned ;" and also to an act en- 
titled, " An act, supplementary to an act, entitled, an act for the en- 
couragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and 
books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times 
therein mentioned ; and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of 
designing, engraving and etching historical and other prints." 



JOHN W. DAVlsA Cle '\f lhe P isiricl 
1 I of Massachusetts. 



TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. 



The public has been already informed* respecting the 
discovery and publication of the original of the following 
work, but it will be proper to state the principal circum- 
stances here. In the year 1789 the King of Spain, 
Charles IV. conceived the design of establishing at Cadiz 
a repository and library to contain the historical and sci- 
entific works relating to the Marine, which were known to 
exist in the various collections in the kingdom. For this 
purpose he commissioned Don Martin Fernandez de Nav- 
arrete, an officer of rank in the naval department of the 

- realm, to undertake an examination of all the libraries and 
depositories both public and private, in the kingdom, in 

. order to obtain copies of works relating to the proposed 
object. In prosecution of this plan, Don Martin began 
the next year to explore the collection of manuscripts in 
the royal library at Madrid, extending his researches at 
times to the archives of the Marquisses of Santa Cruz. 

* North American Review, No. LIII, and LV. 



IV PREFACE. 

and Villa Franca, and the Duke of Medinasidonia. He 
afterwards proceeded to examine the royal collections of 
manuscripts at St. Isidore and the Escurial. In the 
course of these inquiries, being in the immediate search 
of the termination to the fabulous narrative of Lorenzo 
Ferrer Maldonado, with a view to make some examina- 
tions respecting its authenticity, he was directed to the 
archives of the Duke del Infantado, where it was under- 
stood, there was a probability that it might be found. In 
his researches in this quarter, he met with two manu- 
scripts which proved on examination to be the narratives 
of the first and third voyages of Columbus. 

The disturbed state of the kingdom which followed this 
period, and the official duties which interrupted the enter- 
prise of Don Martin, prevented these valuable discoveries 
form being given to the public till the year 1825, when 
they were by the order of the present King, published at 
Madrid with many other documents, in two volumes, under 
the title of Coleccion de los Viages y Descnbrimienios que 
hicieron por mar los Espaholes desde fines del Siglo XV. etc. 
of which work the following translation forms but a small 
portion. 

This performance thus casually brought to light, we 
cannot hesitate to regard, both as respects the subject and 
the author, as the most valuable and interesting which the 



PREFACE. V 

researches for the above-mentioned object could have 
offered to us. The manuscript is in the hand-writing of 
Bartolome de las Casas, and is evidently an abridgement 
of the original journal of Columbus, made by this author in 
the course of his labors in compiling his History of the 
Indies. Las Casas possessed a great number of manu- 
scripts written by Columbus, which he made use of as 
materials for his History; this work was brought down to 
the year 1520, but has never been published, as the gen- 
eral strain of the writer's representations is unfavorable to 
the character of the Spaniards. Two original manuscripts 
of the work exist in the library of the Spanish Royal Acad- 
emy of History, and another in the Royal Library. These 
have been turned to great use by the Spanish historians of 
America, in particular Herrera, an examination of whose 
work will render it evident that Las Casas must have made 
copious and particular extracts into his History from the 
journal of Columbus, which indeed appears to be the 
groundwork of the historian's narrative as far as it 
extends. 

Although the following narration appears, for the most 
part in the shape of an abstract by another hand, from the 
oiiginal diary, yet the reader will perceive that the in- 
troduction, and other extensive passages of the narrative 
are preserved in the precise words of Columbus. These 
will be distinguished from the rest, as the writer at such 



Vl PREFACE. 

times speaks in his own person: the other parts, being 
probably abridged of uninteresting particulars and repeti- 
tions, are given in the language of the transcriber. 

It will be hardly necessary to remind the reader that he 
cannot expect to meet in this work with that regular order 
and elaborate execution displayed in modern works upon 
kindred subjects. A book of voyages or travels at the 
present day is not thought likely to prove acceptable with 
the public, unless drawn up with a lucid and methodical 
arrangement of matter, and a proper display of taste and 
care in the language. The authors of these writings 
never lose sight of the fact, or rather make it their sole 
contemplation, that the productions of their industry will 
be judged of in the light of literary performances, and this 
consideration demands from them the exercise of a judge- 
ment and skill in the disposition of their matter, and se- 
lection of their language, which it would be both vain and 
unreasonable to look for in a performance like the follow- 
ing;. Nothing was probably farther from the intentions or 
thoughts of Columbus and his transcriber in executing this 
volume, than to make a book ; and nothing could be per- 
formed with a more settled disregard of the idea. Colum- 
bus describes the objects which he saw, and the events 
which occurred from day i.o day, without essaying to give 
his narrative any greater portion of method or regularity 
than such as was unavoidably connected with the manner 



PREFACE. VH 

of its performance. The thoughts which strike him from 
time to time, are entered upon the journal just as they 
happen to occur, whether they relate to the present, past 
or future matters of the voyage ; and when subsequent 
events prove them erroneous, he takes no care to go back 
to the place of their insertion to rectify his statements. 
His comments and speculations, as well as many of his 
descriptions, are inserted without reflecting whether any 
part of them have been mentioned before, and often at 
times when they do not apply to the portion of the narra- 
tive in which they are introduced. 

It cannot be expected that where so little care is exhib- 
ited in laying out the matter of a work, any great attention 
should be paid to the language ; it is in fact careless and 
incorrect to a high degree. This circumstance, connect- 
ed with the fact that the Spanish work is attended with the 
disadvantages of an incorrect punctuation, an erroneous 
and antiquated orthography, and other imperfections which 
accompany ancient and decayed manuscripts, will it is 
hoped be deemed a sufficient excuse for any errors which 
may be discovered in the following translation. 

Although the translator is sensible that the character of 
the performance might be improved in some respects by 
retrenching and transposing many passages, and render- 
ed more acceptable as to language by a freer interpreta- 



Vlll PREFACE. 

tion, yet reflecting that such a course would deprive it Or- 
the distinct and characteristic features of the original, he 
judged it unadvisable to attempt giving it a shape in any 
respect different from the Spanish, or to deviate from the 
unambitious simplicity of expression in which the original 
narrative is given, for the purpose of embellishing his lan- 
guage. Except, therefore, in a few cases where the dif- 
fuseness of the writer degenerates into tautology, no lib- 
erties have been taken with the text. Everything relating 
to such a man as Columbus must be valuable and interest- 
ing. His manner of relating the events in which he was 
engaged, and describing the objects he saw, cannot be in- 
different to us. The surprise and unmeasured admiration 
he expresses on viewing the scenes which his discoveries 
daily opened to his sight, strongly engage our attention. 
His comments and speculations upon every object which 
presented itself, though often fanciful and enthusiastical- 
ly extravagant, yet possess a deep interest as exhibiting 
the train of thought which guided him in his undertaking. 
His very repetitions are not without their significance in 
showing the strong and lively impression made upon his 
mind by various circumstances of the voyage. All parts 
of the narrative combine in rendering it of the highest 
value, not only as an historical document, but as a means 
of estimating the character of the great discoverer of 

AMERICA. 

Boston, July, 1827. 



FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. 



(lN THE NAME OF OUR LORD JESUS CHRIST. / 

Whereas, Most Christian, High, Excellent and 
Powerful Princes, King and Queen of Spain and 
of the Islands of the Sea, our Sovereigns, this 
present year 1492, after your Highnesses had 
terminated the war with the Moors reigning in 
Europe, the same having been brought to an end 
in the great city of Granada, where on the second 
day of January, this present year, I saw the royal 
banners of your Highnesses planted by force of 
arms upon the towers of the Alhambra, which is 
the fortress of that city, and saw the Moorish 
king come out at the gate of the city and kiss 
the hands of your Highnesses, and of the Prince 
my Sovereign ; and in the present month, in con- 
sequence of the information which I had given 
your Highnesses respecting the countries of 
India and of a Prince, called Great Can, which 
in our language signifies King of Kings, how, at 
many times he, and his predecessors had sent to 
1 



10 FIRST VOYAGE 

Rome soliciting instructers who might teach him 
our holy faith, and the holy Father had never 
granted his request, whereby great numbers of 
people were lost, believing in idolatry and doc- 
tcines of perdition.* Your Highnesses, as Cath- 
olic Christians, and princes who love and promote 
the holy Christian faith, and are enemies of the 
doctrine of Mahomet, and of all idolatry and her- 
esy, determined to send me, Christopher Colum- 
bus, to the above-mentioned countries of India, to 
see the said princes, people, and territories, and to 
learn their disposition and the proper method of 
converting them to our holy faith ; and further- 
more directed that I should not proceed by land 
to the East, as is customary, but by a Westerly 
route, in which direction we have hitherto no cer- 
tain evidence that any one has gone. So after hav- 
ing expelled the Jews from your dominions, your 
^Highnesses, in the same month of January, order- 
ed me to proceed with a sufficient armament to 
the said regions of India, and for that purpose 
granted me great favors, and ennobled me that 
thenceforth 1 might call myself Don, and be High 
Admiral of the Sea, and perpetual Viceroy and 
Governor in all the islands and continents which 
I might discover and acquire, or which may here- 
after be discovered and acquired in the ocean : 

* See Note I. at the end of the volume. 



OF COLUMBUS. 1 1 

and that this dignity should be inherited by my 
eldest son, and thus descend from degree to de- 
gree forever. Hereupon I left the city of Gran- 
ada, on Saturday, the twelfth day of May, 1492, 
and proceeded to Palos, a seaport, where 1 arm- 
ed three vessels, very fit for such an enterprise, 
and having provided myself with abundance of 
stores and seamen, I set sail from the port, on 
Friday, the third of August, half an hour before 
sunrise, and steered for the Canary Islands of 
your Highnesses, which are in the said ocean, 
thence to take my departure and proceed till I 
arrived at the Indies, and perform the embassy 
of your Highnesses to the Princes there, arid dis- 
charge the orders given me. For this purpose I 
determined to keep an account of the voyage, and 
to write down punctually every thing we per- 
formed or saw from day to day, as will hereaf- 
ter appear. Moreover, Sovereign Princes, be- 
sides describing every night the occurrences of 
the day, and every day those of the preceding 
night, 1 intend to draw up a nautical chart, which 
shall contain the several parts of the ocean and 
land in their proper situations; and also to com- 
pose a book to represent the whole by picture with 
latitudes and longitudes, on all which accounts it 
behoves me to abstain from my sleep, and make 
many trials in navigation, which things will de- 
mand much labor. 



12 FIRST VOYAGE 

Friday, Aug. 3d, 1492. Set sail from the bar 
of Saltes* at 8 o'clock, and proceeded with a 
strong breeze till sunset, sixty milest or fifteen 
leagues S. afterwards SW. and S. by W. which 
is the direction of the Canaries. 

Saturday, Aug. 4th. Steered SW. by S. 

Sunday, Aug. 5th. Sailed day and night more 
than forty leagues. 

Monday, Aug. 6th. The rudder of the car- 
avel;}; Pinta became loose, being broken or un- 
shipped. It was believed that this happened by 
the contrivance of Gomez Rascon and Christo- 
pher Quintero, who were on board the caravel, 
because they disliked the voyage. The Admi- 
ral says he had found them in an unfavorable 
disposition before setting out. He was in much 
anxietv at not being able to afford any assistance 
in this case, but says that it somewhat quieted 
his apprehensions to know that Martin Alonzo 
Pinzon, Captain of the Pinta, was a man of cour- 
age and capacity. Made a progress, day and 
night, of twenty nine leagues. 

Tuesday, Aug. 7th. The Pinta's rudder again 
broke loose ; secured it, and made for the island 

* Harbour of Palos, a little north of Cadiz. 

| Italian miles, four to the league. 

t A caravel is a long, single decked vessel, with three 
masts and latine sails. The Admiral's ship, called the 
Santa Maria, was square-rigged. 



OF COLUMBUS. 13 

of Lanzarote, one of the Canaries. Sailed, day 
and night, twenty-five leagues. 

Wednesday, Aug. 8th. There were divers 
opinions among the pilots of the three vessels, as 
to their true situation, and it was found that the 
Admiral was the most correct. His object was 
to reach the island of Grand Canary, and leave 
there the Pinta, she being leaky, besides having 
her rudder out of order, and take another vessel 
there, if any one could be had. They were una- 
ble to reach the island that day. 

Thursday, Aug. 9th. The Admiral did not 
succeed in reaching the island of Gomera till Sun- 
day night. Martin Alonzo remained at Grand 
Canary by command of the Admiral, he being un- 
able to keep the other vessels company. The ^y 
Admiral afterwards returned to Grand Canary, 
and there with much labor repaired the Pinta, 
being assisted by Martin Alonzo and the others ; 
finally they sailed to Gomera. They saw a great 
eruption of flames from the Peak of Teneriffe ; 
which is a lofty mountain. The Pinta which be- 
fore had carried latine sails, they altered and 
made her square-rigged. Returned to Gomera, 
Sunday, Sept. 2d, with the Pinta repaired. 

The Admiral says, that he was assured by 
many respectable Spaniards, inhabitants of the 
island of Ferro, who were at Gomera with Dona 
Inez Peraza, mother of Guillen Peraza, after- 



14 FIRST VOYAGE 

wards first Count of Gomera, that they every 
year saw land to the west of the Canaries ; and 
others of Gomera affirmed the same with the 
like assurances. The Admiral here says that he 
remembers, while he was in Portugal, in 1484, 
there came a person to the King from the island 
of Madeira, soliciting for a vessel to go in quest 
of land, which he affirmed he saw every year, 
and always of the same appearance. He also 
says that he remembers the same was said by the 
inhabitants of the Azores and described as in a 
similar direction, and of the same shape and size.* 

* A meteoric appearance observed to the west of the Ca- 
naries occasioned the inhabitants of those islands to imag- 
ine they saw a country in that direction; it bore the name 
of the isle of Brandon or Borondon, and was laid down in all 
the early maps. Saint Brandon or Brandam, was a Bene- 
dictine monk of the sixth century, and according to the 
legend concerning him was, with his companions, seven 
years in pursuit of a western paradisic isle called Lna. The 
inhabitants, also, of Madeira and the Azores, deceived by 
an appearance similar to the above, entertained the belief 
that land existed to the west of them. This belief was 
current from the middle of the fifteenth century, and many 
expeditions were undertaken for the discovery of these 
countries, some of them by the orders of the king of Por- 
tugal. Although they met with no success, the popular 
imagination of the existence of these territories still con- 
tinued. 

Another island by the name of Aatilla was laid down in 
their maps by the Portuguese, westward of Madeira, they 
give the following account of it. In the year 714 when the 
Moors conquered Spain, seven bishops accompanied by a 
number of people sailed to the West, and discovered an 
island, where they landed and burnt their ships, lest any of 
the people should abandon them. They built seven cities 



OF COLUMBUS. 15 

Having taken in wood, water, meat, and other 
provisions, which had been provided by the men 
which he left ashore on departing for Grand 

and remained there. Several Portuguese ships afterwards 
sailed thither and never returned home. In the time of 
the Infant Don Henry, a ship arrived at this island, where 
the crew went on shore, and the islanders straightway 
carried them to their church, in order to ascertain whether 
they were catholics, of which fact having satisfied them- 
selves, they entreated them to remain a k\v days for their 
sovereign, who would rejoice to see them. But those of 
the ship fearing that the inhabitants would burn her, em- 
barked in all haste and returned to Portugal. The sand 
which they found upon the shore of the island was a third 
part gold. 

To the above may be added the following curious narra- 
tion of Ebn Al Ouardi an Arabian Geographer, who died, 
according to D'Herbelot, in 1348, or according to others, 
in 1446. After describing Spain and Portugal, and stating 
that these countries are bordered by the dark sea, which is 
very dangerous, he adds that eight persons of the city of 
Lisbon, desirous to know what was situated beyond the 
ocean, equipped a vessel with all the necessaries for a long 
voyage, and swore not to return till they had penetrated 
to the extremity of the ocean, and arrived at the land oppo- 
site. These navigators sailed eleven days, when they found 
themselves upon a sea without bottom, where the waves 
were high, and the winds drove them to the South: after pro- 
ceeding on twelve days longer, they discovered an island 
which our author calls Dgezirat alghanam, the isle of sheep, 
because the Arabs found upon it many of these animals, 
which they could not eat for the bitterness of their flesh, 
but contented themselves with taking the skins. They found 
also a spring of fresh water, a supply of which they took on 
board and re-embarked. They sailed twelve days more 10 
the South and discovered another island, which was inhab- 
ited; the people came in boats and conducted them to a 
house on the shore. They were of a red complexion, and 
tall stature. At the end of three days there came an inter- 
preter who spoke Arabic, he conversed with them upon the 



16 FIRST VOYAGE 

Canary to repair the Pinta, the Admiral took his 
final departure from Gomera with the three ves- 
sels on Thursday, Sept. Cth. 

Thursday Sept. 6th. Set sail from the har- 
bour of Gomera this morning and shaped their 
course for the voyage. The Admiral learnt 
bv a vessel from the island of Ferro, that there 
were three Portuguese caravels cruising about 
there in search of him. This circumstance prob- 
ably originated in the envy of the King of Por- 
tugal, as the Admiral had left him to resort to 
Castile. It was calm the whole day and night ; 
in the morning they found themselves between 
Gomera and TenerhTe. 

subject of their voyage, and went to give an account of 
them to the king of the isle. The king informed them that 
he had likewise sent his men to make discoveries in that 
vast ocean, that they had sailed West for a month, when 
being stopped from proceeding by the great darkness which 
surprised them, they returned without discovering any 
thing. The Arabs afterwards returned to Lisbon, where 
in memory of this event one of the streets was called Al- 
magrurim, or the wanderers, which name it long retained. 
See the Notices et Extraits dcs Manuscrils de la Biblwiheque 
du Roi. T. 2. p. 24. with the remarks of M. de Guignes, 
who draws the following conclusions from the narrative. 
That the Arabs were accustomed to make expeditions of 
discovery far into the Atlantic Ocean. That they probably 
approached very near the continent of America, and with a 
little more perseverance would have arrived there. That 
the red color of the inhabitants of the island, which is that 
of the natives of America, gives a probability to the rela- 
tion. That the island could not be one of the Canaries, 
because the Arabs were acquainted with them. See 
Note FT. 



OF COLUMBUS. 1 7 

Friday, Sept. 7th. Calm all Friday, and till 
three o'clock P. M. on Saturday. 

Saturday, Sept. 8th. At three in the afternoon 
the wind rose from the N. E. Steered their 
course W. encountered a strong head sea, which 
impeded their progress. Sailed, day and night, 
nine leagues. 

Sunday, Sept. 9th. Sailed this day nineteen 
leagues, and determined to count less than the 
true number, that the crew might not be dis- 
mayed if the voyage should prove long. In the 
night sailed one hundred and twenty miles, at the 
rate of ten miles an hour, which make thirty 
leagues. The sailors steered badly, causing the 
vessels to fall to leeward toward the Northeast, 
for which the Admiral reprimanded them repeat- 
edly. 

Monday, Sept. 10th. This day and night 
sailed sixty leagues, at the rate of ten miles an 
hour, which are two leagues and a halt Reck- 
oned only forty-eight leagues, that the men 
might not be terrified if they should be long upon 
the voyage. 

Tuesday, Sept. 11th. Steered their course 
W. and sailed above twenty leagues ; saw a large 
fragment of the mast of a vessel, apparently of 
a hundred and twenty tons, but could not pick 
it up. In the n^ht sailed about twenty leagues. 



18 FIRST VOYAGE 

and reckoned only sixteen, for the cause above 
stated. 

Wednesday, Sept. 12th. This day steering 
their course, sailed day and night thirty-three 
leagues, and reckoned less, for the same cause. 

Thursday, Sept. 13th. This day and night 
sailed W. thirty-three-leagues, and reckoned 
three or four less. The currents were against 
them. At the first of the evening this day, the 
needles varied to the N. W. and the next morn- 
ins: about as much in the same direction. 

Friday, Sept. 14th. Steered this day and night 
W. twenty leagues ; reckoned somewhat less. 
The crew of the Nina stated that they had seen 
agrajao, and a tropic bird, or water-wagtail, which 
birds never go farther than twenty-five leagues 
from the land. 

Saturday, Sept. 15th. Sailed day and night, 
W. tvventv-seven leagues and more. In the be- 
ginning of the night saw a remarkable bolt of fire 
fall into the sea at the distance of four or five 
leagues. 

Sunday, Sept 16th. Sailed day and night, W. 
thirty-nine leagues, and reckoned only thirty six. 
Some clouds arose and it drizzled. The Admi- 
ral here says that from this time they experien- 
ced very pleasant weather, and that the mornings 
were most delightful, wanting nothing but the 
melody of the nightingales. He compares the 



OF COLUMBUS. 19 

weather to that of Andalusia in April. Here 
the j began to meet with large patches of weeds 
very green, and which appeared to have been 
recently washed away from the land; on which 
account they all judged themselves to be near 
some island,* though not a continent, according 
to the opinion of the Admiral, who says, ' the 
continent we shall find further ahead.' 

Monday, Sept. 17th. Steered W. and sailed, 
day and night, above fifty leagues ; wrote down 
only forty-seven; the current favored them. 
They saw a great deal of weed which proved 
to be rock-weed, it came from the W. and they 
met with it very frequently. They were of opin- 
ion that land was near. The pilots took the sun's 
amplitude, and found that the needles varied to 
the N. W. a whole point of the compass; the 
seamen were terrified, and dismaved without 
saying why. The Admiral discovered the 
cause, and ordered them to take the amplitude 
again the next morning, when they found that 
the needles were true; the cause was, that the 
star moved from its place, while the needles 
remained stationary.t At dawn they saw many 
more weeds, apparently river weeds, and among 

* They were, in fact, at this time in the neighborhood 
of a shoal afterwards discovered. 

| It is hardly necessary to remark that this explanation 
of the phenomenon was invented bv Columbus to quiet 
the apprehensions of his crews. 



20 FIRST VOYAGE 

them a live crab, which the Admiral kept, and 
says that these are sure signs of land, being never 
found eighty leagues out at sea. They found 
the sea-water less salt since they left the Ca- 
naries, and the air more mild. They were all 
very cheerful, and strove which vessel should out- 
sail the others, and be the first to discover land ; 
they saw many tunnies, and the crew of the 
Nina killed one. The Admiral here says that 
these signs were from the west, ' where 1 hope 
that high God in whose hand is all victory 
will speedily direct us to land.' This morning 
he says he saw a white bird called a water-wag- 
tail, or tropic bird, which does not sleep at sea. 

Tuesday, Sept. 18th. Continued their course, 
and sailed day and night more than fifty-five 
leagues ; wrote down only forty-eight. All 
this time they had experienced fair weather, 
and sailed as they would have done upon the 
river at Seville. This day Martin Alonzo in 
the Pinta which was a swift sailer, ran ahead 
of the other vessels, he having informed the Ad- 
miral that he had seen great flocks of birds 
towards,the W. and that he expected that night 
to reach land; for this reason he kept on ahead 
of the others. A great mass of dark, heavy 
clouds appeared in the north, which is a sign of 
being near the land. 

Wednesday, Sept. 19th. Continued on, and 



OF COLUMBUS. 21 

sailed, day and night twenty-five leagues, expe- 
riencing a calm. Wrote down twenty-two. 
This day at ten o'clock a pelican came on board, 
and in the evening another ; these birds are not 
accustomed to go twenty leagues from land. It 
drizzled without wind, which is a sure sign of 
land. The Admiral was unwilling to remain 
here, beating about in search of land, but he 
held it for certain that there were islands to the 
North and South, which in fact was the case 
and he was sailing in the midst of them.* His 
wish was to proceed on to the Indies, having 
such fair weather, for if it please God, as the 
Admiral says, we shall examine these parts upon 
our return. Here the pilots found their places 
upon the chart: the reckoning of the Nina 
made her four hundred and forty leagues distant 
from the Canaries, that of the Pinta four hundred 
and twenty, that of the Admiral four hundred.! 
Thursday, Sept. 20th. Steered W. by N. 
varying with alternate changes of the wind and 
calms ; made seven or eight leagues progress. 
Two pelicans came on board, and afterwards 
another, — a sign of the neighborhood of land. 
Saw large quantities of weeds to day, though 

* It does not appear what islands Las Casas refers to 
in the above remark ; they were at this time nearly in the 
centre of the Atlantic ocean. Breakers were discovered 
about this spot in 1802, but no land has ever been seen 
in the neighborhood. 

| Their true distance. 



22 FIRST VOYAGE 

none was observed yesterday. Caught a bird 
similar to agrajao ; it was a river and not a ma- 
rine bird, with feet like those of a gull. To- 
wards night two or three land birds came to the 
ship, singing; they disappeared before sunrise. 
Afterwards saw a pelican coming from W. N. W. 
and flying to the S. W ; an evidence of land to the 
westward, as these birds sleep on shore, and go 
to sea in the morning in search of food, never 
proceeding twenty leagues from the land. 

Friday, Sept. 21st. Most of the day calm, 
afterwards a little wind. Steered their course 
day and night, sailing less than thirteen leagues. 
In the morningfound such abundance of weeds 
that the ocean seemed to be covered with them; 
they came from the west. Saw a pelican ; 
the sea smooth as a river, and the finest air in 
the world. Saw a whale, an indication of land, 
as they always keep near the coast. 

Saturday, Sept. 22d Steered about W. N. W. 
varying their course, and making thirty leagues 
progress. Saw few weeds. Some pardelas* 
were seen, and another bird. The Admiral 
here says, 4 this head wind was very necessary to 
me, for my crew had grown much alarmed, dread- 
ing that they never should meet in these seas with a 
fair wind to return to Spain.'' Part of the day 
saw no weeds, afterwards great plenty of it. 

* A bird about the size of a pigeon. 



OF COLUMBUS. 23 

Sunday, Sept. 23d. Sailed N. W. and N. W. by 
N. and at times W. nearly twenty-two leagues. 
Saw a turtle dove, a pelican, a river bird, and 
other white fowl; — weeds in abundance with 
crabs among them. The sea being smooth and 
tranquil, the sailors murmured, saying, that they 
had got into smooth water, where it would never 
blow to carry them back to Spain ; but afterwards 
the sea rose without wind, which astonished 
them. The Admiral says on this occasion ' the 
rising of the sea ivas very favorable to me, as it 
happened formerly to Moses when he led the Jews 
from Egypt.' 

Monday, Sept, 24th. Continued their course 
W. and sailed day and night fourteen leagues 
and a half; reckoned twelve ; a pelican came 
to the ship, and they saw many pardelas. 

Tuesday, Sept. 25th. Very calm this day ; 
afterwards the wind rose. Continued their 
course W. till night. The Admiral held a con- 
versation with Martin Alonzo Pmzon, captain of 
the Pinta, respecting a chart which the Admiral 
had sent him three days before, in which it ap- 
pears he had marked down certain islands in 
that sea ; # Martin Alonzo was of opinion that 

* This chart drawn by Columbus, seems to have been a 
copy of one sent to Lisbon in 1474 by Paul Toscanelli a 
Florentine astronomer; it was a chart of the Atlantic 
Ocean with the islands and countries of India in the west. 
See Note I. 



24 FIRST VOVAGE 

they were in their neighborhood, and the Ad- 
miral replied that he thought the same, but as 
they had not met with them, it must have been 
owing to the currents which had carried them 
to the NE. and that they had not made such 
progress as the pilots stated. The Admiral di- 
rected him to return the chart, when he traced 
their course upon it in presence of the pilot and 
sailors. 

At sunset Martin Alonzo called out with great 
joy from his vessel that he saw land, and de- 
manded of the Admiral a reward for his intel- 
ligence. The Admiral says, when he heard him 
declare this, he fell on his knees and returned 
thanks to God, and Martin Alonzo with his crew 
repeated Gloria in cxcelsis Deo, as did the crew 
of the Admiral. Those on board the Nina as- 
cended the rigging, and all declared they saw 
land. The Admiral also thought it was land, 
and about twenty-five leagues distant. They 
remained all night repeating these affirmations, 
and the Admiral ordered their course to be 
shifted from W. to SW. where the land appear- 
ed to lie. They sailed that day four leagues and 
a half W. and in the night seventeen leagues 
SW. in all twenty-one and a half: told the crew 
thirteen leagues, making it a point to keep them 
from knowing how far they had sailed; in this 
manner two reckonings were kept, the shorter 



OF COLUMBUS. 25 

one falsified, and the other being the true account. 
The sea was very smooth and many of the sail- 
lors went in it to bathe, saw many dories and 
other fish. 

Wednesday, Sept. 26th. Continued their 
course W. till the afternoon, then SW. and dis- 
covered that what they had taken for land was 
nothing but clouds. Sailed, day and night, thirty- 
one leagues; reckoned to the crew twenty-four. 
The sea was like a river, the air soft and mild. 
Thursday, Sept. 27th. Continued their 
course W. and sailed, day and night, twenty-four 
leagues, reckoned to the crew twenty. Saw 
many dories, and killed one. Saw a tropic bird. 

Friday, Sept. 28th. Continued their course 
West, and sailed, day and night with calms, four- 
teen leagues, reckoned thirteen; met with a 
few weeds; caught two dories, and the other 
vessels more. 

Saturday, Sept. 29th. Continued their course 
W. and sailed twenty-four leagues ; reckoned to 
the crew twenty-one. On account of calms made 
little progress this day. Saw a bird called Rabi- 
horcado, which forces the pelicans to disgorge 
what they have swallowed, and then devours it; 
this is its only way of providing food; it is a mar- 
ine bird, but never alights at sea, nor goes twenty 
leagues from land; there are many of them in 
the Cape Verd islands. Afterwards there came 
3 



26 FIRST VOYAGE. 

two pelicans. The air was soft and refreshing, 
and the Admiral says nothing was wanting but 
the singing of the nightingale; the sea smooth 
as a river. Three times they saw three peli- 
cans, and a Rabihorcado. Many weeds ap- 
peared. , 

Sunday, Sept. 30th. Continued their course 
W. and sailed day and night in calms, fourteen 
leagues ; reckoned eleven. Four tropic-birds 
came to the ship, which is a very clear sign of 
land, for so many birds of one sort, together, show 
that they are not straying about having lost 
themselves. Twice, saw two pelicans; many 
weeds. The constellation called Las Guardias,* 
which at evening appeared in a westerly t di- 
rection, was seen in the NE. the next morn- 
ing, making no more progress in a night of nine 
hours, this was the case every night, as says the 
Admiral. At night the needles varied a point 
towards the NW. in the morning they were true, 
by which it appears that the polar star moves, 
like the others, and the needles are always right. 

Monday, Oct. 1st. Continued their course 
W. and sailed twenty-five leagues ; reckoned to 
the crew twenty. Experienced a heavy shower. 

* Charles's Wain. 

j" Probably an error for Northerly, which is (he state- 
ment in the Biography of Columbus, by his son ; Don Fer- 
nando, who relates this circumstance. 



OF COLUMBUS. 27 

The pilot of the Admiral began to fear this 
morning that they were five hundred and seven- 
ty-eight leagues West of the island of Ferro. 
The short reckoning which the Admiral showed 
his crew, gave five hundred and eighty-four, but 
the true one which he kept to himself was seven 
hundred and seven leagues. 

Tuesday, Oct. 2d. Continued their course W. 
day and night, thirty-nine leagues ; reckoned to 
the crew thirty; the sea ever smooth and favor- 
able. ' Many thanks be to God,'' says the Admi- 
ral here. Weeds came from the E. towards the 
W. the contrary to what they had before ob- 
served. Saw many fish and took one. A white 
bird, which appeared to be a gull, was seen. 

Wednesday, Oct. 3d. Continued their accus- 
tomed course, and sailed forty-seven leagues ; 
reckoned to the crew forty. Many pardelas ap- 
peared, and great quantities of weed, some of it 
old, and some very fresh, which appeared to con- 
tain fruit. Saw no other birds. The Admiral 
believed they had passed the islands contained 
in his chart. Here the Admiral says that he 
was unwilling to stay beating up and down the 
week before, when they had so many signs of 
land, though he knew there were islands in that 
quarter, because his wish was to proceed onward 
to the Indies, and to linger on the way he thought 
would be unwise. 

Thursday, Oct. 4th. Continued their course 



20 FIRST VOYAGE 

W. Sailed day and night, sixty-three leagues, and 
reckoned to the crew forty-six. There came to 
the ship above forty pardelas in a flock, with two 
pelicans ; a boy on board the caravel hit one of 
them with a stone. A rabihorcado came to the 
ship, and a white bird like a gull. 

Friday, October 5th. Continued their course 
and sailed eleven miles an hour; day and night ; 
fifty-seven leagues, the wind abating in the night, 
reckoned to the crew forty- five. Fine weather 
and the sea smooth. ' Many thanks to GodS 
says the Admiral. The air soft and temperate ; 
no weeds; many pardelas were seen, and swal- 
low-fishes in great numbers came on board. 

Saturday, Oct. 6th. Continued their course 
W. and sailed forty leagues day and night ; reck- 
oned to the crew thirty-three. This night Mar- 
tin Alonzo gave it as his opinion that they had 
belter steer from W. to SW. The Admiral 
thought from this that Martin Alonzo did not 
wish to proceed onward to Cipango ;* but he 

*Zipangri or Japan, the name given to this island by 
Marco Polo, a Venetian, who travelled into the east during 
the thirteenth century. The most extravagant accounts of 
the riches of this country were given by the writers of that 
age, and its situation being placed by the geographers of 
the time, at the eastern extremity of India, Columbus, 
who expected by sailing west, to arrive there, naturally 
imagined that Cipango was the part of that country near- 
est to the west of Europe. 

Martin Behaim or Behem, a German, who afterwards 
entered into the service of the King of Portugal, construct- 



OF COLUMBUS. 



29 



considered it best to keep on his course, as he 
should probably reach the land sooner in that di- 
rection, preferring to visit the continent first, and 
then the islands. 

Sunday, Oct. 7th. Continued their course W. 
and sailed twelve miles an hour, for two hours, 
then eight miles an hour. Sailed till an hour 
after sunrise, twenty-three leagues; reckoned to 
the crew eighteen. At sunrise the caravel Nina, 
who kept ahead on account of her swiftness in 
sailing, while all the vessels were striving to out- 
sail one another, and gain the reward promised 
by the King and Queen by first discovering land 
— hoisted a flag at her mast head, and fired a lom- 
barda* as a signal that she had discovered land, 
for the Admiral had given orders to that effect. 
He had also ordered that the ships should keep 
in close company at sunrise and sunset, as the air 
was more favorable at those times for seeinof at 



*» 



ed at Nuremberg in 1492, a terrestrial globe, of which a 
representation of that part comprising the Atlantic ocean 
may be seen in Cladera's Investigaciones Historicas. 
Southwest of the Azores is marked down the island of An- 
tilia. Southwest of the Cape Verd islands, near the equa- 
tor, the island of St. Brandon. Directly West from the 
Canaries, near the continent of India, is drawn a very 
large island with these notices, ' Cipangu.' ' En esta isla 
crecen las Especias ; Hay Syrenas en el mar.'' l Se adoran 
los Idohs" &.c. : &c. A vast number of isles large and 
small are scattered to the North, South, and West of this 
spot. 

*A sort of cannon, first brought from Lombardy. 



30 FIRST VOYAGE 

a distance. Towards evening seeing nothing of 
the land which the Nina had made signals for, 
and observing large flocks of birds coming from 
the N. and making for the SW. whereby it was 
rendered probable that they were either going 
to land to pass the night, or abandoning the coun- 
tries of the North, on account of the approaching 
winter, he determined to alter his course, know- 
ing also that the Portuguese had discovered most 
of the islands they possessed by attending to the 
flight of birds. The Admiral accordingly shifted 
his course from W. to WSW. with a resolution 
to continue two days in that direction.- This was 
done about an hour after sunset. Sailed in the 
night nearly five leagues, and twenty-three in the 
day. In all twenty-eight. 

Monday, Oct. 8th. Steered WSW. and sailed 
day and night eleven or twelve leagues ; at times 
during the night, fifteen miles an hour, if the ac- 
count can be depended upon. Found the sea 
like the river at Seville, ' thanks to GW,' says the 
Admiral. The air soft as that of Seville in 
April, and so fragrant that it was delicious to 
breath it. The weeds appeared very fresh. 
Many land birds, one of which they took, flying 
towards the SW. also grajaos, ducks, and a peli- 
can were seen. 

Tuesday, Oct. 9th. Sailed SW. five leagues, 
when the wind changed, and they stood W. by 



OF COLUMBUS. 31 

N. four leagues. Sailed in the whole, day and 
night, twenty leagues and a half; reckoned to 
the crew seventeen. All night heard birds 
passing. 

Wednesday, Oct. 10th. Steered WSW. and 
sailed at times ten miles an hour, at others 
twelve, and at others, seven; day and night 
made fifty-nine leagues progress; reckoned to the 
crew but forty-four. Here the men lost all pa- 
tience, and complained of the length of the voy- 
age, but the Admiral encouraged them in the 
best manner he could, representing the profits 
they were about to acquire, and adding that it 
was to no purpose to complain, having come so 
far, they had nothing to do but continue on to 
the Indies, till with the help of our Lord, they 
should arrive there.* 

* This period is near the date of the occurrence, 
which, on the authority of Oviedo, has been related in 
most of the modern accounts of the discovery — namely 
that Columbus found himself so embarrassed and pressed 
by the mutiny of his crew, who were terrified at the length 
of the voyage, that he was obliged to enter into an agree- 
ment with them, that in case land should not be discovered 
within three days, he would abandon the enterprise, and 
return to Spain. Not the slightest hint of such a circum- 
stance is to be found in this jourual, nor is there any im- 
aginable reason for the suppression of the fact by Colum- 
bus, had it really occurred. Las Casas certainly would 
not have omitted so important an item in making his ab- 
stract, and this was evidently drawn up from the diary of 
Columbus, written from day to day, and not from a narra- 
tive executed after his return to Spain, in which an omis- 



32 FIRST VOYAGE 

Thursday, Oct. 11th. Steered WSW. ; and 
encountered a heavier sea than they had met 
with before in the whole voyage. Saw parde- 
las and a green rush near the vessel. The crew 
of the Pinta saw a cane and a log ; they also 
picked up a stick which appeared to have been 
carved with an iron tool, a piece of cane, a plant 
which grows on land, and a board. The crew 
of the Nina saw other signs of land, and a stalk 
loaded with roseberries. These signs encourag- 
ed them, and they all grew cheerful. Sailed 
this day till sunset, twenty-seven leagues. 

After sunset steered their original course W. 
and sailed twelve miles an hour till two hours 
after midnight, going ninety miles, which are 
twenty-two leagues and a half; and as the Pinta 
was the swiftest sailer, and kept ahead of the 
Admiral, she discovered land and made the sig- 
nals which had been ordered. The land was 
first seen by a sailor called Rodrigo de Triana, 
although the Admiral at ten o'clock that evening 
standing on the quarter-deck saw a light, but so 
small a body that he could not affirm it to be 

sion of this sort might be more easily accounted for. Nei- 
ther Herrera nor Don Fernando who give very minute re- 
lations of the occurrences of the voyage, make any mention 
of it. Munoz adverts to the circumstance, but appears 
evidently inclined to disbelieve it. Robertson has admitted 
the account into his History, but it seems, upon the whole, 
not to be entitled to credit. 



OP COLUMBUS. 33 

land ; calling to Pero Gutierrez, groom of the 
King's wardrobe, he told him he saw a light, and 
bid him look that way, which he did and saw it; 
he did the same to Rodrigo Sanchez of Segovia, 
whom the King and Queen had sent with the 
squadron as comptroller, but he was unable to 
see it from his situation. The Admiral again 
perceived it once or twice, appearing like the 
light of a wax candle moving up and down, which 
some thought an indication of land. But the 
Admiral held it for certain that land was near; 
for which reason, after they had said the Salve 
which the seamen are accustomed to repeat and 
chant after their fashion, the Admiral directed 
them to keep a strict watch upon the forecastle 
and look out diligently for land, and to him who 
should first discover it he promised a silken 
jacket, besides the reward which the King and 
Queen had offered, which was an annuity of ten 
thousand maravedis. At two o'clock in the 
morning, the land Was discovered, at two leagues 
distance ; they took in sail and remained under 
the square-sail lying to till day, which was Friday, 
when they found themselves near a small island, 
one of the Lucayos, called in the indian language 

* The reward for the discovery was adjudged by the 
King and Queen to be justly due to Columbus, as he was 
the first who saw the light. The annuity of 10,000 mara- 
vedis was therefore punctually paid him through the rest 
•of his life . 



34 FIRST VOYAGE 

Guanahani.* Presently they descried people, 
naked, and the Admiral landed in the boat, which 
was armed, along with Martin Alonzo Pinzon, 
and Vincent Yanez his brother, captain of the 
Nina. The Admiral bore the royal standard, 
and the two captains each a banner of the Green 
Cross, which all the ships had carried; this con- 
tained the initials of the names of the King and 
Queen each side of the cross, and a crown over 
each letter. Arrived on shore, they saw trees 
very green, many streams of Avater, and diverse 
sorts of fruitss. The Admiral called upon the 

* The island first discovered has been hitherto generally 
supposed to be that now called St. Salvador, or Cat Island, 
between 24 and 2d degrees north latitude. But upon an 
examination of the journal of Columbus, it will appear that 
his general course from the discovery of the first land, 
was West till he arrived at the Island of Cuba. Had this 
route been taken from the Island of St. Salvador, the in- 
numerable reefs and keys upon the Great Bahama Bank 
would have obstructed his way. Nor would the course 
which he appears to have steered, have conducted him to 
the port of Nipe in Cuba, the part of the island first reach- 
ed by him, had that course commenced at St. Salvador. 
Add to this, that his description of the island does not suit 
that place, nor, as far as can be made out with any accu- 
racy, do the bearings and distances of the other islands from 
the one first visited, agree with the neighborhood of the sup- 
posed spot of the discovery. 

It seems probable that the island in question is the one 
now called Grand Turk, or Turk's Island: this opinion is 
sustained by the description of Columbus, stating it to be flat, 
without any lofty eminence, surrounded by a reef of rocks, 
and with a lake in the centre, all which circumstances, es- 
pecally the last, point out this place. The course after- 
wards pursued by the ships on leaving it, agrees also with 
the direction in which it lies from the others. 



OF COLUMBUS. 35 

two Captains, and the rest of the crew who land- 
ed, as also to Rodrigo de Escovedo notary of 
the fleet, and Rodrigo Sanchez, of Segovia, to 
bear witness that he before all others took pos- 
session (as in fact he did) of that island lor the 
King and Queen his sovereigns, making the re- 
quisite declarations, which are more at large set 
down here in writing. Numbers of the people 
of the island straightway collected together. 
Here follow the precise words of the Admi- 
ral. 4 As I saw that they were very friend- 
ly to us, and perceived that they could be much 
more easily converted to our holy faith by gen- 
tle means than by force, I presented them 
with some red caps, and strings of beads to wear 
upon the neck, and many other trifles of small 
value, wherewith they were much delighted, and 
became wonderfully attached to us. Afterwards 
they came swimming to the boats, bringing par- 
rots, balls of cotton thread, javelins and many 
other things which they exchanged for articles 
we gave them, such as glass beads, and hawk's 
bells ; which trade was carried on with the ut- 
most good will. But they seemed on the whole 
to me, to be a very poor people. They all go 
completely naked, even the women, though I 
saw but one girl. All whom I saw, were young, 

Munoz, in his History of the New World, gives it as 
his opinion that the land first discovered, was that now 
called Wat ling's inland, but does not subjoin bis reasons 



36 FIRST VOYAGE 

not above thirty years of age, well made, with 
fine shapes and faces ; their hair short, and 
coarse like that of a horse's tail, combed toward 
the forehead, except a small portion which they 
suffer to hang down behind, and never cut. Some 
paint themselves with black, which makes them 
appear like those of the Canaries, neither black 
nor white; others with white, others with red, 
and others with such colors as they can find. 
Some paint the face, and some the whole body; 
others only the eyes, and others the nose. 
Weapons they have none, nor are acquainted 
with them, for I showed them swords whi-ch 
they grasped by the blades, and cut themselves 
through ignorance. They have no iron, their 
jaVelins being without it, and nothing more than 
sticks, though some have fish-bones or other 
things at the ends. They are all of a good size 
and stature, and handsomely formed. I saw 
some with scars of wounds upon their bodies, and 
demanded by signs the cause of them ; they an- 
swered me in the same way, that there came peo- 
ple from the other islands in the neighborhood 
who endeavored to make prisoners of them, and 
they defended themselves. I thought then, and 
still believe, that these were from the continent. 
It appears to me, that the people are ingenious, 
and would be good servants ; and I am of opinion 
that they would very readily become Christians, 
as they appear to have no religion. They very 



OF COLUMBUS. 37 

quickly learn such words as are spoken to them. 
If it please our Lord, I intend at my return to 
carry home six of them to your Highnesses, that 
they may learn our language. I saw no beasts 
in the island, nor any sort of animals except par- 
rots. These are the words of the Admiral.* 

Saturday, Oct. 13th. ' At day-break great 
multitudes of men came to the shore, all young 
and of fine shapes, very handsome ; their hair not 
curled but straight and coarse like horse-hair, 
and all with foreheads and heads much broader 
than any people I had hitherto seen ; their eyes 
were large and very beautiful ; they Avere not 
black, but the colour of the inhabitants of the 
Canaries, which is a very natural circumstance, 
they being in the same latitude with the island 
of Ferro in the Canaries. They were straight- 
limbed without exception, and not with prominent 
bellies but handsomely shaped. They came to 
the ship in canoes, made of a single trunk of a 
tree, wrought in a wonderful manner considering 
the country ; some of them large enough to con- 
tain forty or forty-five men, others of different 
sizes down to those fitted to hold but a single 
person. They rowed with an oar like a baker's 
peel, and wonderfully swift. If they happen to 
upset, they all jump into the sea, and swim till 
they have righted their canoe and emptied it 

* The narration is continued in Columbes's own words, 
to Oct. 25th. 



38 FIRST VOYAGE 

with the calabashes they carry with them. They 
came loaded with balls of cotton, parrots, javelins, 
and other things too numerous to mention ; these 
they exchanged for whatever we chose to give 
them. I was very attentive to them, and strove 
to learn if they had any gold. Seeing some of 
them with little bits of this metal hanging at their 
noses, 1 gathered from them by signs that by 
going southward or steering round the island in 
that direction, there would be found a king who 
possessed large vessels of gold, and in great quan- 
tities. 1 endeavored to procure them to lead the 
way thither, but found they were unacquainted 
with the route. I determined to stay here till 
the evening of the next day, and then sail for the 
SW. for according to what I could learn from 
them, there was land at the S. as well as at the 
SW. and NW. and those from the NW. came 
many times and fought with them and proceeded 
on to the SW. in search of gold and precious 
stones. This is a large and level island, with 
trees extremely flourishing, and streams of water; 
there is a large lake in the middle of the island, 
but no mountains : the whole is completely cover- 
ed with verdure and delightful to behold. The 
natives are an inoffensive people, and so desirous 
to possess any thing they saw with us, that they 
kept swimming off to the ships with whatever 
they could find, and readily bartered for any ar- 
ticle we saw fit to give them in return, even such 



OF COLUMBUS. 39 

as broken platters and fragments of glass. I saw 
in this manner sixteen balls of cotton thread 
which weighed above twenty-five pounds, given 
for three Portuguese ceutis* This traffic 1 for- 
bade, and suffered no one to take their cotton 
from them, unless 1 should order it to be procured 
for your Highnesses, if proper quantities could 
be met with. It grows in this island, but from 
my short stay here I could not satisfy myself 
fully concerning it ; the gold, also, which they 
wear in their noses, is found here, but not to lose 
time, I am determined to proceed onward and as- 
certain whether I can reach Cipango. At night 
they all went on shore with their canoes. 

Sunday, Oct. 14th. In the morning, I ordered 
the boats to be got ready, and coasted along the 
island toward the NNE. to examine that part of 
it, we having landed first at the eastern part. 
Presently we discovered two or three villages, 
and the people all came down to the shore, call- 
ing out to us, and giving thanks to God. Some 
brought us water, and others victuals : others see- 
ing that I was not disposed to land, plunged into 
the sea and swam out to us, and we perceived 
that they interrogated us if we had come from 
heaven. An old man came on board my boat ; 
the others, both men and women cried with loud 

* A coin worth less than a mill 



40 FIRST VOYAGE 

voices — ' Come and see the men who have come from 
heaven. Bring them victuals and drink." 1 There 
came many of both sexes, every one bringing 
something, giving thanks to God, prostrating 
themselves on the earth, and lifting up their 
hands to heaven. They called out to us loudly 
to come to land, but I was apprehensive on ac- 
count of a reef of rocks, which surrounds the 
whole island, although within there is depth of 
water and room sufficient for all the ships of 
Christendom, with a very narrow entrance. 
There are some shoals withinside, but the water 
is as smooth as a pond. It was to view these 
parts that I set out in the morning, for I wished 
to give a complete relation to your Highnesses, 
as also to find where a fort might be built. I dis- 
covered a tongue of land which appeared like an 
island though it was not, but might be cut through 
and made so in two days ; it contained six houses. 
I do not however see the necessity of fortifying 
the place, as the people here are simple in war- 
like matters, as your Highnesses will see by those 
seven which I have ordered to be taken and car- 
ried to Spain in order to learn our language and 
return, unless your Highnesses should choose to 
have them all transported to Castile, or held 
captive in the island. I could conquer the whole 
of them with fifty men, and govern thern as I 
pleased. Near the islet I have mentioned were 



OF COLUMBUS. 41 

groves of trees, the most beautiful I have ever 
seen, with their foliage as verdant as we see in 
Castile in April and May. There were also many 
streams. After having taken a survey of these 
parts, I returned to the ship, and setting sail, dis- 
covered such a number of islands that I knew 
not which first to visit ; the natives whom I had 
taken on board, informed me by signs that there 
were so many of them that they could not be 
numbered ; they repeated the names of more 
than a hundred. I determined to steer for the 
largest, which is about five leagues from San Sal- 
vador; the others were some at a greater, and 
some at a less distance from that island. They 
are all very level, without mountains, exceeding- 
ly fertile and populous, the inhabitants living at 
war with one another, although a simple race, 
and with delicate bodies. 

'Monday, Oct. 15th. Stood off and on during 
the night, determining not to come to anchor till 
morning, fearing to meet with shoals ; continued 
our course in the morning; and as the island was 
found. to be six or seven leagues distant, and the 
tide was against us, it was noon when we arrived 
there.* I found that part of it towards San Sal- 
vador extending from N. to S. five leagues, and 
the other side which we coasted along, ran from 

* Probably Grand Cayr.o 



42 FIRST VOYAGE 

E. to W. more than ten leagues. From this island 
espying a still larger one to the W. I set sail in 
that direction and kept on till night without reach- 
ing the western extremity of the island, where I 
gave it the name of Sa?ita Maria de la Concep- 
tion* About sunset we anchored near the cape 
which terminates the island towards the W. to en- 
quire for gold, for the natives we had taken from 
San Salvador told me that the people here wore 
golden bracelets upon their arms and legs. I 
believed pretty confidently that they had invent- 
ed this story in order to find means to escape from 
us, still I determined to pass none of these islands 
without taking possession, because being once 
taken, it would answer for all times. We an- 
chored and remained till Tuesday, when at day- 
break I went ashore with the boats armed. The 
people we found naked like those of San Salva- 
dor, and of the same disposition. They suffered 
us to traverse the island, and gave us what we 
asked of them. As the wind blew S.E. upon 
the shore where the vessels lay, 1 determined 
not to remain, and set out for the ship. A large 
canoe being near the caravel Nina, one of the San 
Salvador natives leaped overboard and swam to 
her ; (another had made his escape the night 
before,) the canoe being reached by the fugitive, 
the natives rowed for the land too swiftly to be 

* Cayco del Norte. 



OP COLUMBUS. 43 

overtaken; having landed, some of my men 
went ashore in pursuit of them, when they 
abandoned the canoe and fled with precipi- 
tation ; the canoe which they had left was 
brought on board the Nina, where from another 
quarter had arrived a small canoe with a single 
man, who came to barter some cotton ; some of 
the sailors finding him unwilling to go on board 
the vessel, jumped into the sea and took him. I 
was upon the quarter deck of my ship, and see- 
ing the whole, sent for him, and gave him a red 
cap, put some glass beads upon his arms, and two 
hawk's bells upon his ears. 1 then ordered his 
canoe to be returned to him, and despatched him 
back to land. 

I now set sail for the other large island to the 
W. and gave orders for the canoe which the 
Nina had in tow to be set adrift. I had refused 
to receive the cotton from the native whom I 
sent on shore, although he pressed it upon me. I 
looked out after him and saw upon his landing 
that the others all ran to meet him with much 
wonder. It appeared to them that we were honest 
people, and that the man who had escaped from 
us had done us some injury, for which w r e kept 
him in custody. It was in order to favor this notion 
that I ordered the canoe to be set adrift, and gave 
the man the presents abovementioned, that when 
your Highnesses send another expedition to these 
parts it may meet with-a friendly reception. All 



44 FIRST VOYAGE 

I gave the man was not worth four nlaravedis. 
We set sail about ten o'clock, with the wind S. 
E. and stood southerly for the island I mentioned 
above, which is a very large one, and where ac- 
cording to the account of the natives on board, 
there is much gold, the inhabitants wearing it in 
bracelets upon their arms, legs, and necks, as well 
as in their ears and at their noses. This island 
is nine leagues distant from Santa Maria in a 
westerly direction. This part of it extends from 
N.W, to S.E. and appears to be twenty-eight 
leagues long, very level, without any mountains, 
like San Salvador and Santa Maria, having a good 
shore and not rocky, except a feAv ledges under 
water, which renders it necessary to anchor at 
some distance, although the water is very clear, 
and the bottom may be seen. Two shots of a 
lombarda from the land, the water is so deep that 
it cannot be sounded ; this is the case in all these 
islands. They are all extremely verdant and fer- 
tile, with the air agreeable, and probably contain 
many things of which I am ignorant, not inclining 
to stay here, but visit other islands in search of 
gold. And considering the indications of it among 
the natives who wear it upon their arms and legs, 
and having ascertained that it is the true metal 
by showing them some pieces of it which I have 
with me, I cannot fail, with the help of our Lord 
to find the place which produces it. 



OF COLUMBUS. 45 

Being at sea, about midway between Santa 
Maria and the large island, which I name Fer- 
nandina,* Ave met a man in a canoe going from 
Santa Maria to Fernandina ; he had with him a 
piece of the bread which the natives make, as 
big as one's fist, a calabash of water, a quantity 
of reddish earth, pulverised and afterwards 
kneaded up, and some dried leaves which are in 
high value among them, for a quantity of it was 
brought to me at San Salvador ; he had besides 
a little basket made after their fashion, contain- 
ing some glass beads, and two blancas t by all 
which I knew he had come from San Salvador, 
and had passed from thence to Santa Maria. He 
came to the ship and I caused him to be taken 
on board, as he requested it ; we took his canoe 
also on board and took care of his things. I or- 
dered him to be presented with bread and honey, 
and drink, and shall carry him to Fernandina and 
give him his property, that he may carry a good 
report of us, so that if it please our Lord when 
your Highnesses shall send again to these regions, 
those who arrive here may receive honor, and 
procure what the natives may be found to pos- 
sess. 

Tuesday, Oct. 16th. Set sail from Santa 
Maria about noon, for Fernandina, which ap- 

+ Now called Inagua Chica. J Copper coins of Spain 



46 FIRST VOYAGE 

pearecl very large in the W ; sailed all the day 
with calms, and could not arrive soon enough to 
view the shore and select a good anchorage, 
for great care must he taken in this particular, 
lest the anchors be lost. Beat up and down all 
night, and in the morning arrived at a village 
and anchored. This was the place to which the 
man whom we had picked up at sea, had gone, 
when we set him on shore. He had given such 
a favorable account of us, that all night there 
were great numbers of canoes coming oif to us, 
who brought us water and other things. I or- 
dered each man to be presented with something, 
as strings of ten or a dozen glass beads, plates 
of brass, such as cost in Castile a maravedi 
apiece, and thongs of leather, all which they es- 
timated highly ; those which came on board I 
directed should be fed with molasses. At three 
o'clock, I sent the boat on shore for water; the 
natives with great good will directed the men 
where to find it, assisted them in carrying (he 
casks full of it to the boat, and seemed to take 
great pleasure in serving us. This is a very 
large island, and I have resolved to coast it 
about, for as 1 understand, in, or near the island, 
there is a mine of gold. It is eight leagues W. 
of Santa Maria, and the cape where we have 
arrived, and all this coast extends from N. N. W. 
to S. S. E. I have seen twenty leagues of if, but 



GF COLUMBUS. 



47 



not the end. Now, writing this, I set sail with 
a southerly wind to circumnavigate the island, 
and search till we can find Samaot, which is the 
island or city where the gold is, according to the 
account of those who come on board the ship, to 
which the relation of those of San Salvador 
and Santa Maria corresponds. These people 
are similar to those of the islands just mention- 
ed, and have the same language and customs j 
with the exception that they appear somewhat 
more civilised, showing themselves more subtle 
in their dealings with us, bartering their cotton 
and other articles with more profit than the 
others had experienced. Here we saw cotton 
cloth, and perceived the people more decent, the 
women wearing a slight covering of cotton over 
the nudities. The island is verdant, level and 
fertile to a high degree ; and I doubt not that 
grain is sowed and reaped the whole year round, 
as well as all other productions of the place. I 
saw many trees, very dissimilar to those of our 
country, and many of them had branches of dif- 
ferent sorts upon the same trunk ; and such 
a diversity was among them that it was the 
greatest wonder in the world to behold. Thus, 
for instance, one brancli of a tree bore leaves 
like those of a cane, another branch of the same 
tree, leaves similar to those of the lentisk. In 
this manner a single tree bears five or six differ- 



48 FIRST VOYAGE 

ent kinds. Nor is this done by grafting, for that 
is a work of art, whereas these trees grow 
wild, and the natives take no care about them. 
They have no religion, and I believe that they 
would very readily become Christians, as they 
have a good understanding. Here the fish are 
so dissimilar to ours that it is wonderful. Some 
are shaped like dories, of the finest hues in the 
world, blue, yellow, red, and every other colour, 
some variegated with a thousand different tints, 
so beautiful that no one on beholding them 
could fail to express the highest wonder and ad- 
miration. Here are also whales. Beasts, we 
saw none, nor any creatures on land save par- 
rots and lizards, but a boy told me he saw a 
large snake. No sheep nor goats were seen, 
and although our stay here has been short, it 
being now noon, yet were there any, I could 
hardly have failed of seeing them. The circum- 
navigation of the island I shall describe after- 
ward. 

Wednesday Oct. 17th. At noon set sail from 
the village where we had anchored and watered. 
Kept on our course to sail round the island ; the 
wind S. W. and S. My intention was to follow 
the coast of the island to the S. E. as it runs in 
that direction, being informed by the indians I 
have on board, besides another whom I met with 
here, that in such a course I should meet with 



OF COLUMBTS. 49 

the island which they call Samoet, where gold 
is found. I was further informed by Martin 
Alonzo Pinzon captain of the Pinta, on board of 
which I had sent three of the indians, that he 
had been assured by one of them, I might sail 
round the island much sooner by the N. VV. 
Seeing that the wind would not enable me to 
proceed in the direction I first contemplated, and 
finding it favorable for the one thus recommend- 
ed me, I steered to the N. W. and arriving at the 
extremity of the island at two leagues distance, I 
discovered a remarkable haven with two en- 
trances, formed by an island at its mouth, both 
very narrow, the inside capacious enough for a 
hundred ships, were there sufficient depth of 
water. I thought it advisable to examine it, and 
therefore anchored outside, and went with the 
boats to sound it, but found the water shallow. As 
I had first imagined it to be the mouth of a river, 
I had directed the casks to be carried ashore 
for water, which being done we discovered eight 
or ten men who straightway came up to us, and 
directed us to a village in the neighborhood, I 
accordingly dispatched the crews thither in 
quest of water, part of them armed, and the 
rest with the casks, and the place being at some 
distance it detained me here a couple of hours. 
In the mean time I strayed about among the 
groves, which present the most enchanting sight 



50 FIRST VOYAGE 

ever witnessed, a degree of verdure prevailing 
like that of May in Andalusia, the trees as differ- 
ent from those of our country as day is from 
night, and the same may be said of the fruit, the 
weeds, the stones and every thing else. A few 
of the trees however, seemed to be of a species 
similar to some that are to be found in Castile, 
though still with a great dissimilarity, but the 
others so unlike, that it is impossible to find any 
resemblance in them to those of our land. 
The natives we found like those already de- 
scribed, as to personal appearance and manners, 
and naked like the rest. Whatever they pos- 
sessed, they bartered for what we chose to give 
them. I saw a boy of the crew purchasing jave- 
lins of them with bits of platters and broken 
o-lass. Those who went for water informed me 
that they had entered their houses and found 
them very clean and neat, with beds and cover- 
ings of cotton nets. Their houses are all built 
in the shape of tents, with very high chimneys. 
None of the villages which I saw, contained more 
than twelve or fifteen of them. Here it was re- 
marked that the married women wore cotton 
breeches, but the younger females were without 
them, except a few who were as old as eighteen 
years. Dogs were seen of a large and small size, 
and one of the men had hanofinof at his nose a 



OF COLUMBUS. 51 

piece of gold half as big as a castcllano* with let- 
ters upon it. I endeavored to purchase it of them 
in order to ascertain what sort of money it 
wast but they refused to part with it. Having 
taken our water on board, I set sail and pro- 
ceeded N. W. till I had surveyed the coast to 
the point where it begins to run from E. to W. 
Here the indians gave me to understand that 
this island was smaller than that of Samoet, and 
that I had better return in order to reach it the 
sooner. The wind died away, and then sprang 
up from the W. N. W. which Avas contrary to 
the course we were pursuing, we therefore hove 
about and steered various courses through the 
night from E. to S. standing off from the land, 
the weather being cloudy and thick. It rained 
violently from midnight till near day, and the 
sky still remains clouded ; we remain off the 
the southeast part of the island, where I expect 
to anchor and stay till the weather grows clear, 
when I shall steer for the other islands 1 am in 
quest of. Every day that I have been in these 
Inches it has rained more or less. 1 assure your 
Highnesses that these lands are the most 
fertile, temperate, level and beautiful countries 
iu the world. 

* Ancient .Spanish coin. 

| In this, it appears, Columbus was mistaken, nothing 
like a coin was ever found amoiifr the natives. 



52 FIRST VOYAGE 

Thursday, Oct. 18th. As soon as the sky 
grew clear, we set sail and went as far round the 
island as we could, anchoring when we found it 
inconvenient to proceed, I did not however land. 
In the morning set sail again. 

Friday, Oct. 19th. In the morning we got 
under weigh, and I ordered the Pinta to steer 
E. and S.E. and the Nina, S.S.E. proceeding my- 
self to the SE. the other vessels I directed to 
keep on the courses prescribed till noon, and then 
to rejoin me. Within three hours we descried 
an island to the E. toward which we directed 
our course, and arrived all three, before noon, at 
the northern extremity, where a rocky islet and 
reef extend toward the North, with another be- 
tween them and the main island. The Indians 
on board the ships called this island Saomctc. I 
named it Isabela.* It lies westerly from the is- 
land of Fernandina, and the coast extends from 
the islet twelve leagues, west, to a cape which 
I called Cabo Hennosorf it being a beautiful, 
round headland with a bold shore free from 
shoals. Part of the shore is rocky, but the rest 
of it, like most of the coast here, a sandy beach. 
Here we anchored till morning. This island is 

* This appears to be the island now called Lingua 
grande. 

| Fair Cape. 



OF COLUMBUS. 53 

the most beautiful that 1 have yet seen, the trees 
in great number, flourishing and lofty ; the land 
is higher than the other islands, and exhibits an 
eminence, which though it cannot be called a 
mountain, yet adds a beauty to its appearance, 
and gives an indication of streams of water in the 
interior. From this part toward the northeast 
is an extensive bay, with many large and thick 
groves. I wished to anchor there, and land, that 
I might examine those delightful regions, but 
found the coast shoal, without a possibility of 
casting anchor except at a distance from the 
shore. The wind being favorable, I came to 
the Cape, which I named Hermoso, where I an- 
chored to-day. This is so beautiful a place, as 
well as the neighboring regions, that I know not in 
which course to proceed first; my eyes are never 
tired with viewing such delightful verdure, and 
of a species so new and dissimilar to that of our 
country, and I have no doubt there are trees and 
herbs here which would be of great value in 
Spain, as dyeing materials, medicine, spicery, &c. 
but I am mortified that I have no acquaintance 
with them. Upon our arrival here we experi- 
enced the most sweet and delightful odour from 
the flowers or trees of the island. To-morrow 
morning before we depart, I intend to land and 
see what can be found in the neighborhood. 
Here is no village, but farther within the island 



54 FIRST VOYAGE 

is one, where our Indians inform us we shall find 
the king, and that he has much gold. I shall 
penetrate so far as to reach the village and see 
or speak with the king, who, as they tell us, gov- 
erns all these islands, and goes dressed, with a 
great deal of gold about him. I do not, however, 
give much credit to these accounts, as I under- 
stand the natives but imperfectly, and perceive 
them to be so poor that a trifling quantity of 
gold appears to them a great amount. This is- 
land appears to me to be a separate one from 
that of Saometo, and I even think there may be 
others between them. I am not solicitous to ex- 
amine particularly every thing here, which in- 
deed could not be done in fifty years, because my 
desire is to make all possible discoveries, and re- 
turn to your Highnesses, if it please our Lord, in 
April. But in truth, should I meet with gold or 
spices in great quantity, I shall remain till I col- 
lect as much as possible, and for this purpose I 
am proceeding solely in quest of them. 

Saturday, Oct. 20th. At sunrise we weighed 
anchor, and stood to the NE. and E. along the 
south side of this island, which I named Isabela 
and the cape where we anchored, Cabo de la La- 
guna ; in this direction I expected from the ac- 
count of our Indians, to find the capital, and king 
of the island. I found the coast very shallow, 
and offering every obstacle to our navigation, and 



OF COLUMBUS. 55 

perceiving that our course this way must be 
very circuitous, I determined to return to the 
westward. The wind failed us, and we were un- 
able to get near the shore before night ; and as 
it is very dangerous anchoring here in the dark, 
when it is impossible to discern among so many 
shoals and reefs whether the ground be suita- 
able, I stood off and on all night. The other 
vessels came to anchor, having reached the 
shore in season. As was customary among us, 
they made signals to me to stand in and anchor, 
but I determined to remain at sea. 

Sunday, Oct. 21st. At 10 o'clock, we arrived 
at a cape of the island, and anchored, the other 
vessels in company. After having dispatched a 
meal, I went ashore, and found no habitation save 
a single house, and that without an occupant ; we 
had no doubt that the people had fled in terror 
at our approach, as the house was completely 
furnished. 1 suffered nothing to be touched, and 
went with my captains and some of the crew to 
view the country. This island even exceeds the 
others in beauty and fertility. Groves of lofty 
and flourishing trees are abundant, as also large 
lakes, surrounded and overhung by the foliage, 
in a most enchanting manner. Every thing look- 
ed as green as in April in Andalusia. The melo- 
dy of the birds was so exquisite that one was 
never willing to part from the spot, and the flocks 



56 FIRST VOYAGE 

of parrots obscured the heavens. The diversity 
in the appearance of the feathered tribe from 
those of our country, is extremely curious. A 
thousand different sorts of trees, with their fruit 
were to be met with, and of a wonderfully deli- 
cious odour. It was a great affliction to me to be 
ignorant of their natures, for I am very certain 
they are all valuable ; specimens of them and of 
the plants I have preserved. Going round one 
of these lakes, I saw a snake, which we killed, 
and 1 have kept the skin for your Highnesses ; 
upon being discovered he took to the water, 
whither we followed him, as it was not deep, and 
dispatched him with our lances ; he was seven 
spans in length ; I think there are many more 
such aboitf here. I discovered also the aloe tree, 
and am determined to take on board the ship 
to-morrow, ten quintals of it, as I am told it is val- 
uable. While we were in search of some good 
water, we came upon a village of the natives 
about half a league from the place where the 
ships lay; the inhabitants on discovering us aban- 
doned their houses, and took to flight, carrying 
off their snoods to the mountain. I ordered that 
nothing which they had left should be taken, not 
even the value of a pin. Presently we saw sev- 
eral of the natives advancing towards our party, 
and one of them came up to us, to whom we gave 
some hawk's bells and glass beads, with which 



OF COLUMBUS. 57 

he was delighted. We asked him in return, for 
water, and after I had gone on board the ship, 
the natives came down to the shore with their 
calabashes full, and showed great pleasure in pre- 
senting us with it. I ordered more glass beads 
to be given them, and they promised to return 
the next day. It is my wish to fill all the water 
casks of the ships at this place, which being exe- 
cuted, I shall depart immediately, if the weather 
serve, and sail round the island, till I succeed in 
meeting with the king, in order to see if 1 can 
acquire any of the gold, which I hear he pos- 
sesses. Afterwards I shall set sail for another 
very large island which 1 believe to be Cipango, 
according to the indications I receive from the 
indians on board. They call the Island Colba* 
and say there are many large ships, and sailors 
there. This other island they name Bosio, and 
inform me that it is very large ; the others which 
lie in our course, I shall examine on the passage, 
and according as I find gold or spices in abund- 
ance, I shall determine what to do; at all events I 
am determined to proceed on to the continent, and 
visit the city of Guismj\ where I shall deliver the 

* Cuba. 

| Guisay, or Qucnsmj, the city of Heaven, and residence 
of the Great Khan, according to Marco Polo, and other 
writers of the early ages, who give the most splendid ac- 
counts of this great capital of the east. See Note T 



58 FIRST VOYAGE 

letters of your Highnesses to the Great Can, and 
demand an answer, with which I shall return. 

Monday, Oct. 22d. Through the night, and 
to-day we remained waiting here to see if the 
king, or any others would bring us gold or any 
thing valuable. Many of the natives visited us, 
resembling those of the other islands, naked 
like them, and painted white, red, black and 
other colors; they brought javelins and clews 
of cotton to barter, which they exchanged with 
the sailors for bits of glass, broken cups, and 
fragments of earthen ware. Some of them wore 
pieces of gold at their noses; they readily gave 
them away for hawk's bells and glass beads; 
the amount collected in this manner, however, 
was very inconsiderable. Any small matter 
they received from us, they held in high estima- 
tion, believing us to have come from heaven. We 
took in water for the ships from a lake in the 
neighborhood of this cape, which I have named 
Cabo del Isleo: in this lake Martin Alonzo Pinzon, 
captain of the Pinta, killed a snake similar to 
that of yesterday, seven spans long. 1 ordered 
as much of the alee to be collected as could be 
found. 

Tuesday, Oct. 23d. It is now my determina- 
tion to depart for the island of Cuba, which I 
believe to be Cipango, from the accounts I have 
received here, of the multitude and riches of the 



OF COLUMBUS. 59 

people. I have abandoned the intention of stay- 
ing here and sailing round the island in search of 
the king, as it would be a waste of time, and I 
perceive there are no gold mines to be found. 
Moreover it would be necessary to steer many 
courses in making the circuit, and we cannot ex- 
pect the wind to be always favorable. And as 
we are going to places where there is great com- 
merce, I judge it expedient not to linger on the 
way, but to proceed and survey the lands we 
meet with, till we arrive at that most favorable 
for our enterprise It is my opinion that we shall 
find much profit there in spices ; but my want of 
knowledge in these articles occasions me the most 
excessive regrets, inasmuch as I see a thousand 
sorts of trees, each with its own species of fruit, 
and as flourishing at the present time, as the 
fields in Spain, during the months of May and 
June ; likewise a thousand kinds of herbs and 
flowers, of all which I remain in ignorance as to 
their properties, with the exception of the aloe, 
which I have directed to-day to be taken on 
board in large quantities for the use of your High- 
nesses. I did not set sail to-day for want of wind, 
a dead calm and heavy rain prevailing. Yester- 
day it rained much without cold ; the days here 
are hot, and the nights mild like May in Anda- 
lusia. 

Wednesday Oct. 24th. At midnight weighed 



60 FIRST VOYAGE 

anchor and set sail from Cabo del Isleo of the is- 
land of Isabela, being in the North part, where I 
had remained preparing to depart for the island 
of Cuba, in which place the indians tell me I shall 
find a great trade, with abundance of gold and 
spices, and large ships, and merchants ; they di- 
rect me to steer toward the WSW., which is the 
course I am pursuing. If the accounts which the 
natives of the islands and those on board the 
ships, have communicated to me by signs (for 
their language 1 do not understand) may be reli- 
ed on, this must be the island of Cipango, of 
which we have heard so many wonderful tilings; 
according to my geographical knowledge it must 
be somewhere in this neighborhood. We con- 
tinued our course WSW. till day, when the wind 
died away, while the rain which had been falling 
most of the night continued, we remained thus 
with little wind till the afternoon, when it began 
to blow finely : we crowded all sail, and kept on 
our course till dusk, when Cabo Verde, which is in 
the southwesterly part of the island of Fernan- 
dina, bore NW. seven leagues distant. The 
wind continuing to blow fresh, and not knowing 
the distance to the island of Cuba, I determined 
not to run for it during the night, as these islands 
have bold shores, no bottom being obtained at 
more than two lombarda-shots from the land, 
add to this that they are surrounded with rocks 



OP COLUMBUS. 61 

and shoals in abundance, and the whole renders 
it very hazardous to anchor, except during the 
day. 1 therefore ordered all the sails to be taken 
in except the foresail, and kept on under that ; 
the wind increased, and we made much pro- 
gress, the extent of which 1 could not ascer- 
tain. It was very cloudy with rain, finally I or- 
dered the foresail to be taken in."* 

Thursday, Oct. 25th. Sailed after sunrise 
WSVV. till 9 o'clock, a distance of five leagues, 
then altered their course to W., and went at the 
rate of eight miles an hour till one o'clock ; they 
continued on till three in the afternoon, having 
gone forty-four miles, when they discovered land, 
which proved to be seven or eight islands,! ex- 
tending from north to south, five leagues distant. 

Friday, Oct. 26tb. They anchored south of 
the islands, finding the water shallow five or six 
leagues off the shore. The indians on board told 
them that the island of Cuba was distant from 
thence, a voyage of a day and a half in their ca- 
noes, which are small things, made of a log, and 
carrying no sail. Departed for Cuba, which from 
the indians signifying to them the abundance of 

* Here the words of Columbus cease for the pres- 
ent, and the narrative continues in the language of the 
abridger. 

t In the southern and eastern part of the Great Baha- 
ma bank. 



62 FIRST VOYAGE 

gold and pearls there, as well as the magnitude of 
the island, they doubted not, was Cipango.* 

Saturday, Oct. 27th. They weighed anchor 
at sunrise, and left these islands, which they 
named Las lslas de Arena\ on account of the 
shoals which extend out from them half a dozen 
leagues to the south. Sailed SSW., eight miles 
an hour, till one o'clock, having gone forty miles ; 
by night they had proceeded twenty-eight more 
in the same direction ; before dark they discov- 
ered land. They kept a diligent watch through 
the night which proved veiy rainy. They sail- 
ed on Saturday, by sunset, seventeen leagues to 
the SSW. 

Sunday, Oct. 28th. Continued on SSW., in 
quest of the island of Cuba, keeping close to the 
shore. They entered a fine river, free from 
shallows and all other obstructions, which in fact 
is the case with all the coast here, the shore 
being very bold. The mouth of the river had a 
depth of water of twelve fathoms, and a breadth 
sufficient for ships to beat in. They anchored 
within the river, and the Admiral states that the 

* The belief that Cipango was a part of the newly dis- 
covered country, continued for some time. In a letter 
written by Columbus to the Pope, in 1502, describing his 
voyage, he introduces the following remark. — " This is- 
land is Tarsis, Cethia, Ophir, Ophaz and Cipango, we 
have named it Espanola.' 

f The Sandy Islands. 



OP COLUMBUS. 63 

prospect here exceeded in beauty anything he 
ever saw, the river being surrounded with trees 
of the most beautiful and luxuriant foliage of a 
singular appearance, and covered with flowers 
and fruits of all sorts. Birds were here in abun- 
dance singing most delightfully. Great numbers 
of palm trees were noticed, different from those 
of Guinea, and ours, wanting their particular 
manner of bark ; they were of a moderate 
height, and bore very large leaves, which the 
natives use for coverings to their houses. The 
land appeared quite level. The Admiral went 
ashore in the boat, and found two dwellings, 
which he supposed to be those of fishermen, and 
that the owners had fled ; he found in one of them 
a dog unable to bark. Both houses contained 
nets of palm, lines, horn fish-hooks, harpoons of 
bone, and other implements for fishing, as also 
many fire-places, and each seemed to be adapted 
to the reception of a large number of persons. 
The Admiral gave orders that nothing should 
be touched, which directions were adhered to. 
The grass was as high as it is in Andalusia in 
April and May, and they found purslain and 
strawberry-blite in abundance. They returned 
on board the boat and ascended the river some 
distance, where the Admiral says it was exceed- 
ingly pleasant to behold the delightful verdure 
and foliage which presented itself, not to mention 



154 FIRST VOYAGE 

the birds Jn the neighborhood ; the whole offered 
a scene of such enchantment that it was hardly 
possible to part from it. He declares this to be 
the most beautiful island ever seen, abounding in 
good harbours, and deep rivers, with a shore 
upon which it appears that the sea never breaks 
high, as the grass grows down to the water's 
edge, a thing which never happens where the 
sea is rough. Indeed a high sea they had not as 
yet experienced among these islands. This isle, 
he says, is full of pleasant mountains, which are 
lofty, although not of great extent, the rest of 
the country is high, after the manner of Sicily, 
abounding in streams, as they understood from 
the indians of Guanahani, which were on board 
the ships, who informed them by signs that it 
contained ten large rivers, and was of such 
a size that with their canoes they could not sail 
round it in twenty days. When the ships were 
sailing towards the island, some of the natives 
put off from the shore in two canoes, and per- 
ceiving the Spaniards entering into the boat 
and rowing towards the mouth of the river to 
sound for an anchorage, they took to flight. 
The indians told them there were mines of 
gold here and pearls, and the Admiral observ- 
ed muscles and other indications of these articles 
in the neighborhood. They further informed 
him that there came large ships hither from the 



OF COLUMBUS. 65 

Great Can, and that the main land was distant 
ten days voyage. The Admiral named this, 
river and port San Salvador* 

Monday, Oct. 29th. They weighed anchor 
and sailed from this port towards the west, in 
quest of the city where it appeared to be signi- 
fied to them by the indians, that they would 
meet with the king. A point of the islandf ex- 
tended towards the Northwest, six leagues from 
the place of their departure, and another^ ten 
leagues towards the east. A league further on, 
they discovered a river with a narrow entrance, 
which the Admiral named Rio de la Lwm.§ 
They continued on till evening and descried 
another river larger than those they had yet 
seen, which also the indians signified to them in 
the usual manner ; on the banks they saw many 
collections of houses, the Admiral named it Rio 
de Mares.\\ He dispatched two boats to land in 
order to get some communication with the peo- 
ple, in one of them he sent an indian of those on 
board, as they appeared at last to be contented 
with the company of the Spaniards, and they 

* The Bay of Nipe in the eastern part of Cuba. 
f Punta de Mulas. J Punta Cabana. 

§ Probably Puerto de Banes. 
|j Puerto de las Nuevitas del Principe 
8 



66 FIRST VOYAGE 

were enabled in some degree to understand 
them ; the people on shore, men, women and 
children all fled at their approach, abandoning 
their dwellings and goods, which the Admiral 
ordered should not receive the least injury. He 
states the houses to have been the finest he had 
yet seen, and thinks the nearer he approaches 
toward the continent they will continue improv- 
ing: they were of a large size, constructed in the 
shape of a tent, and each collection of them 
appeared like a camp, without any order of 
streets, but scattered here and there ; the interi- 
ors were found very clean and neat, well furnish- 
ed and set in order ; they were all built of fine 
palm branches. They found here many statues 
in the shape of women, and numerous heads 
something like masks, well executed; whether 
these were used as ornaments, or objects of wor- 
ship, did not appear. Here were small fowl 
originally wild, but now tame about the houses, 
as also curious collections of nets, hooks, and 
other gear for fishing, but the Spaniards, as 
they were ordered, touched nothing. The Ad- 
miral was of opinion that the inhabitants of the 
coast were all fishermen, and carried what they 
took into the interior of the island, as it is a very 
large one, and more beautiful than words can ex- 
press. He says that he met with trees and fruits 
here of a most delicious odour, and that there 



OP COLUMBUS. 67 

are undoubtedly cows and other cattle in the is- 
land, as he saw a skull, which appeared to be 
that of a cow. All the night they were enter- 
tained with the melody of the birds and crickets; 
the air was mild and soft throughout the night, 
neither hot nor cold. In the other islands he 
states the heat to have been excessive, but here 
it was temperate like May. The heat of the 
other islands he ascribes to their being level, and 
the wind, which blows there, being from the 
East and consequently hot. The water of the 
rivers was found to be salt at the mouths : it was 
not known where the indians obtained their 
water, which was met with fresh in their houses. 
This river was broad enough for the ships to 
manoeuvre in on their entry or departure, and 
the land contained many marks to serve as di- 
rections for steering. It was seven or eight 
fathoms deep at the mouth, and five inside. The 
sea about here, he says appears to be ever as 
smooth as the river at Seville, and the water 
very favorable for the pearl fishery. Here were 
periwinkles of a large size, but tasteless, unlike 
those of Spain. The river and port of San Sal- 
vador, above mentioned, he describes as marked 
by lofty and beautiful mountains, like the Pena 
de los cnamorados, one of them containing on its 
summit a protuberance in the form of a hand- 
some mosque. The other river and harbor, 



68 FIRST VOYAGE 

where they now remain, has upon the SE. two 
mountains of a round shape, and at the WNW. 
a fine level cape extends into the sea. 

Tuesday, Oct. 30th. They left the river 
which they had named Rio de Mares, and stand- 
ing to the NW. discovered a cape covered with 
palm trees, which the Admiral called Cabo de 
P almas ;* it was fifteen leagues distant from the 
place of their departure. The indians on board 
the Pinta signified to the Spaniards, that beyond 
this cape was a river,f and from this river to 
Cuba,\ was a distance of four days voyage or 
journey. The Captain of the Pinta declared 
that he understood Cuba to be a city, and that 
the land here was a continent of great size which 
extended far to the North ; also that the king 
of this country was at war with the Great Can, 
whom the Indians called Cami, and his country 
or city Fava and other names. The Admiral 
determined to steer for this river, and dispatch 
a present and the letter of the Spanish sove- 

* Now called Alto de Juan Danue. 

t Rio Maximo. 

J The Spaniards, as the reader must have already per- 
ceived, understood very imperfectly what the natives sig- 
nified to them. Cuba was here meant to denote Ctibanacan 
the centre of the island of Cuba, or it was actually, accord- 
ing to others, the name of the capital province or city of 
the island. 



OF COLUMBUS. 69 

reigns to the king: this he judged best to per- 
form by means of a mariner he had on board, 
who had formerly been in Guinea, and some of 
the indians of Guanahani. The Admiral states 
the latitude of this place to be twenty-one de- 
grees North, if the manuscript from which I have 
copied this be correct, and says he must proceed 
on to the Great Can, whom he supposed was to 
be found thereabout, or to the city of Cathay* 
which he affirms to be a very large city, accord- 
ing as he had learned before he sailed from 
Spain. All the land here he describes as pleas- 
ant and level, bordered with a deep sea. 

Wednesday, Oct. 31st. All Tuesday night 
they beat up and down, and then came to a river 
which they could not enter for the shoals at 
the mouth; the indians thought it as easy to 
enter with the ships as they did with their ca- 
noes. Proceeding onward they discovered a 
capet extending far into the sea, and surrounded 
with shallows ; they saw also a bay capable of 
receiving small vessels, which they could not 
reach, as the wind had shifted to the North, and 
the coast ran NNW. and SE.: another cape which 
they saw farther onward, extended still farther 

* China, at that time was known by this name. 

| Now called Boca de Carabelas grandes St Punta 
I del Maternillo 



70 FIRST VOYAGE 

into the sea. For this reason and observing 
from the appearance of the heavens that it 
threatened to blow violently, they returned to 
Rio de Marcs. 

Thursday, Nov. 1st. At sunrise the Admiral 
sent the boats to land to visit the houses they 
saw there ; they found the inhabitants all fled, 
but after some time they espied a man ; the 
Admiral then dispatched one of his indians on 
shore, who called out to him from a distance 
and bade him not be fearful, as the Spaniards 
were a friendly people, not injuring any one, nor 
belonging to the Great Can, but on the contrary, 
bad made many presents of their goods among the 
inhabitants of the islands. The natives having 
ascertained that no ill was intended them, gath- 
ered confidence, and came in above sixteen canoes 
to the ships, bringing cotton yarn and other 
things, which the Admiral ordered should not be 
taken from them, as he wished them to under- 
stand that he was in search of nothing but gold, 
which they call nucay. All day the canoes kept 
passing between the ships and the shore. The 
Admiral saw no gold among them, but remarks 
having observed an indian with a bit of wrought 
silver at his nostrils, which he conceived to be 
an indication of the existence of that metal in the 
country. The indians informed them by signs 
that within three days there would come many 



OP COLUMBUS. 71 

traders from the interior to purchase the goods 
of the Spaniards, to whom they would communi- 
cate news of the king, who as far as could be 
learnt from the signs of the natives, was about 
four days journey distant. They informed the 
Spaniards also that many persons had been dis- 
patched to inform the king respecting the Admi- 
ral. These people were found to be of the 
same race and manners with those already ob- 
served, without any religion that could be dis- 
covered ; they had never remarked the indians 
whom they kept on board the ships to be en- 
gaged in any sort of devotion of their own, but 
they would upon being directed, make the sign 
of the cross, and repeat the Salve and«/??;e Maria 
with the hands extended towards heaven. The 
language is the same throughout these islands, 
and the people friends to one another, which the 
Admiral says he believes to be the case in all 
the neighboring parts, and that they are at war 
with the Great Can, whom they call Cavila, and 
his country Bafan. These people go naked like 
the rest. The river here he describes as deep, 
and having a bold shore at the mouth, where 
ships may lay close to the land; the water 
of the river salt for a league upwards when 
it becomes very fresh. It is certain, says the 
\dmiral, that this is the continent, and that we 



72 FIRST VOYAGE 

are in the neighborhood of Zayto and Guinsay* 
a hundred leagues more or less distant from the 
one or the other. 

Friday, Nov. 2d. The Admiral resolved to 
send two of the Spaniards into the country; 
those whom he selected for this purpose were 
Rodrigo' de Jerez, of Ayamonte, and Luis de 
Torres, who had lived with the Adelantado of 
Murcia, and knew Hebrew, Chaldaic, and some 
Arabic ; he had been formerly a Jew ; to these 
he joined two of the natives, one of those he had 
brought from Guanahani, and another belonging 
to the houses near the river. He gave them 
strings of beads to purchase provisions, and di- 
rected them to return within six days. Speci- 
mens of spicery were intrusted to them that they 
might judge if any thing similar existed in the 
country. He took care to instruct them how 
they should inquire for the king, and what they 
were to say in informing him that the King and 
Queen of Castile had dispatched the Admiral 
with letters and a present for him, and to learn 
the state of his country and gain his friendship. 
Furthermore the envoys were instructed to ob- 
tain a knowledge of the territory, and observe 
the ports and rivers, with their distances from the 

* Columbus being persuaded that he had arrived at the 
continent of India, thought himself near the cities which 
he names. 



OF COLUMBUS. 73 

place where the ships lay, &c. The Admiral 
here took an observation, and found the latitude 
to be twenty-one degrees ; according to his cal- 
culation, their distance from the island of Ferro 
was eleven hundred and forty-two leagues.* 
He was fully persuaded that this was the con- 
tinent. 

Saturday, Nov. 3d. In the morning the Admi- 
ral went on board his boat, and observing that 
the mouth of the river formed an ample harbour, 
very deep and free from rocks, with a fine beach 
very fit for careening ships, as well as plenty of 
wood on shore, he rowed up the stream a couple 
of leagues to the fresh water, and going on shore, 
ascended a hill to take a view of the country, 
but nothing of the inhabitants was seen on ac- 
count of the thickness of the woods, which dif- 
fused a very odoriferous scent, leading him to 
believe that aromatic plants abounded there. 
The beauty of the prospect was such that he 
declares his eyes were never tired with viewing 
it, nor was the harmony of the feathered tribe 
wanting. Great numbers of canoes came to the 
ships this day for the purpose, of bartering their 
cotton, and nets or hammocs on which they 
sleep. 

Sunday, Nov. 4th. Early in the morning the 
Admiral went on shore in the boat to shoot birds, 

* The true distance was eleven hundred and five leagues. 
9 



74 FIRST V0YA6E 

and at his return, Martin Alonzo Pinzon came to 
him with two pieces of cinnamon, saying that a 
Portuguese on board his vessel had seen an indian 
with two large handfuls of it, but was afraid to 
purchase it on account of the prohibition of the 
Admiral, and furthermore that the indian had 
some reddish things resembling nutmegs. The 
boatswain of the Pinta declared he had seen 
cinnamon trees. The Admiral went to the place 
but found none. He showed some of the natives 
pepper and cinnamon which he had brought 
from Castile, they recognised it as he declares, 
and intimated to him by s^gns that much of it was 
to be found not far from thence to the southeast. 
He likewise showed them gold and pearls, and 
was informed by some old men that these existed 
in great abundance in a place which they called 
Boiiio*, being worn by the people at their necks, 
ears, arms and legs. They had, according to the 
same account, large ships, and carried on traffic, 
and this was all at the southeast. They further 
informed him that at a distance there were men 
with one eye only, and others with faces like dogs, 
who were man-eaters, and accustomed upon taking 
a prisoner, to cut his throat, drink his blood, and 

* Bohw, according to Las Casas, was the name which the 
indians gave to their houses, or, as the same author suggests, 
they might intend to signify by this name the island of Es- 
panola which the inhabitants called Hayti. 



OF COLUMBUS. /5 

dismember him. The Admiral then determined 
to return to his ship and wait for the men whom 
he had sent into the country, when he was re- 
solved to depart in quest of the regions which 
had been described to him, unless he should re 
ceive such accounts from the interior as would 
induce him to stay. He says ' these people are 
very mild and timorous, naked as I have descri- 
bed the others, without weapons or laws. The 
soil is very fertile abounding with mames* a 
root like a carrot, with a taste of chesnuts ; 
Beans, likewise are here, very dissimilar to ours, 
also cotton, growing spontaneously among the 
mountains ; I am of opinion that this is gathered 
at all seasons of the year, as 1 observed upon a 
single tree, blossoms, pods unripe, and others burst 
open. A thousand other productions, which are 
doubtless of great value, I remarked, but find it 
impossible to describe them.' 

Monday, Nov. 5th. In the morning the Admi- 
ral ordered the ships to be careened, one at a 
time, the others remaining afloat for security, 
although he declares the natives were very friend- 
ly, and that they might without hazard have 
careened them all together. While they were 
about this, the boatswain of the Nina came to 
him demanding a reward for having discovered 

* Sweet potatoes according to some. 



76 FIRST VOYAGE 

mastick, the specimen, however, he did not ex- 
hibit, having lost it. The Admiral promised 
him the reward, and sent Rodrigo Sanchez and 
Maestre Diego to examine the trees ; they 
brought back a portion of the gum and of the 
wood, which he preserved for the King and 
Queen. He says that it was evidently mastick, 
although, to be good, it should be collected at 
the proper season ; and that there were trees in 
that neighborhood sufficient to yield a thousand 
quintals a year. Here too he states that he found 
much of that sort of wood which appeared to be 
aloe. This harbour which he called Puerto de 
Mares, is according to his account, one of the 
best in the world, with a fine air, and the inhab- 
itants very gentle. Here is a rocky promontory, 
upon which a fort might be built to defend the 
port if this should become a place of any trade. 
The Admiral adds ' May our Lord, in whose 
hands are all victories, direct all things to his 
service.' An indian informed him by signs that 
the mastick was beneficial to them when they 
were afflicted with pain in the stomach. 

Tuesday, Nov. 6th. Last night, says the Ad- 
miral, the two men whom I had sent into the 
country returned, and related as follows. After 
having travelled a dozen leagues they came 
to a town containing about fifty houses, where 
there were probably a thousand inhabitants. 



OF COLUMBUS. 77 

every house containing a great number ; they 
were built in the manner of large tents. The 
inhabitants received them after their fashion 
with great ceremony ; the men and women 
flocked to behold them, and they were lodged 
in their best houses. They signified their admi- 
ration and reverence of the strangers by touch- 
ing them, kissing their hands and feet, and mak- 
ing signs of wonder. They imagined them come 
from heaven, and signified as much to them. 
They were feasted with such food as the natives 
had to offer. Upon their arrival at the town 
they were led by the arms of the principal men 
of the place, to the chief dwelling, here they 
gave them seats, and the indians sat upon the 
ground in a circle round them. The indians 
who accompanied the Spaniards explained to the 
natives the manner in which their new guests 
lived, and gave a favorable account of their char- 
acter. The men then left the place, and the 
women entered, and seated themselves around 
them in the same manner, kissing their hands and 
feet, and examining whether they were flesh and 
bone like themselves. They entreated them to 
remain there as long as five days. The Span- 
iards showed them the cinnamon, pepper and 
other spices which they had received from the 
Admiral, and they informed them by signs that 
there was much of these in the neighborhood at 



78 FIRST VOYAGE 

the southeast, but they knew not of any in this 
place. The Spaniards not discovering any great 
number of towns here, resolved to return to the 
ships, and had they chosen to admit the natives 
to accompany them, might have been attended 
back by more than five hundred men and women, 
who were eager to bear them company, think- 
ing they were returning to heaven. They took 
none along with them but one of the principal 
inhabitants with his son ; with these the Admi- 
ral held some conversation, and showed them 
great civilities ; the indian described to him by 
signs many countries and islands in these parts, 
and the Admiral thought to carry him home to 
Spain, but says he was unable to find whether 
the indian was willing. At night he seemed to 
grow fearful, and wish to go on shore ; the Ad- 
miral says, that having the ship aground he 
thought it not advisable to oppose him, and so 
let him return, requesting him to come back the 
next morning, but they saw him no more. The 
Spaniards upon their journey met with great 
multitudes of people, men and women with fire- 
brands in their hands and herbs to smoke after 
their custom.* No village was seen upon the 

* Las Casas in his General History of the Indies gives 
Ihe following relation of this circumstance: ' The two Span- 
iards met upon, their journey, great numbers of people of 
both sexes; the men always with a firebrand in their hands 
and certain herbs for smoking: these are dry, and fixed in 
a leaf also dry, after the manner of those paper tubes which 



OP COLUMBUS. 79 

road of a larger size than five houses, but all the 
inhabitants showed them the same respect. 
Many sorts of trees were observed, and herbs 
and odoriferous flowers. Great numbers of birds 
they remarked, all different from those of Spain 
except the nightingales, who entertained them 
with their songs, and the partridges and geese, 
which were found in abundance. Of quadru- 
peds they descried none except dumb dogs. 
The soil appeared fertile and under good culti- 
vation, producing the mames aforementioned and 
beans very dissimilar to ours, as well as the 
grain called panic-grass. They saw vast quanti- 
ties of cotton, spun and manufactured, a sirHe 
house contained above five hundred arrobas ;* 
four thousand quintals might be collected here 

the boys in Spain use at Whitsuntide: having lighted one 
end they draw the smoke by sucking at the other, this 
causes a drowsiness and sort of intoxication, and according 
to their accounts relieves them from the sensation of fatigue. 
These tubes they call by the name of tabacos. I knew 
many Spaniards in the island of Espanola who were ad- 
dicted to the use of them, and on being reproached with 
it as a bad habit, replied that they could not bring them- 
selves to give it up. I do not see what relish or benefit 
they could find in them.' Here we*ee the origin of cigars. 
See Charlevoix Hist, de St. Domingue Lib. I. " le Tabac 
etoit naturel a l'isle Espagnole; les insulaires le nommoient 
Cohiba, et appelloient Tabaco l'instrument dont ils se ser- 
voient pour fumer. On ne doute point aujourd'hui que ce 
ne soit la 1'origine du mot de Tabac, et e'est une erreur 
populaire que de l'attribuer a l'isle de Tabago.' 

* An arroba is twenty-five pounds. 



80 FIRST VOYAGE 

per annum. The Admiral says it appears to him 
that they do not sow it, but that it is productive 
the whole year round ; it is very fine with an ex- 
ceeding long staple. Every thing which the in- 
dians possessed they were ready to barter at a 
very low price ; a large basket of cotton they 
would give for a leather thong, or other trifling 



& 



thing which was offered them. They are an 
inoffensive, unwarlike people, naked, except that 
the women wear a very slight covering at the 
loins ; their manners are very decent, and their 
complexion not very dark, but lighter than that 
of the inhabitants of the Canary Islands. ' I 
have no doubt, most serene Princes ' says the 
Admiral, 4 that were proper devout and religious 
persons to come among them and learn their lan- 
guage, it would be an easy matter to convert rthem 
all to Christianity, and I hope in our Lord that 
your Highnesses will devote yourselves with 
much diligence to this object, and bring into the 
church so many multitudes, inasmuch as you have 
exterminated those who refused to confess the 
Father Son and Holy Ghost,* so that having end- 
ed your days (as we are all mortal) you may 
leave your dominions in a tranquil condition, free 
from heresy and wickedness, and meet with a 
favorable reception before the eternal Creator. 

* This refers to the Moors and Jews, as has been seen 
in the preface of Columbus. 



OF COLUMBUS. 81 

whom may it please to grant you a long life and 
great increase of kingdoms and dominions, with 
the will and disposition to promote, as you always 
have done, the holy christian religion, Amen. 

This day I launched the ship, and made ready 
to depart in the name of God, next Thursday, for 
the SE. in quest of gold and spices, as well as 
to discover the country.' These are the words 
of the Admiral, who expected to sail on Thursday, 
but the wind being contrary, detained him till the 
twelfth day of November. 

Monday, Nov. 12th. They sailed from the 
port and river de Mares at day break : they di- 
rected their course in search of an island which 
the indians on board affirmed repeatedly was 
called Babeque* where as they related by signs, 
the inhabitants collected gold at night by torch- 
light upon the shore, and afterwards hammered 
it into bars. In order to reach this island they 
directed to steer East by South. Having sailed 
eight leagues along the coast, they discovered a 
fiver, and four leagues further onward, another, 
very large, exceeding in size all which they had 
seen. The Admiral was unwilling to remain, and 
put into either of them, for two reasons, the first 
and principal one, because the wind and weather 

* This name was given by the natives, to the coast of 
Tierra Firme, which they also called Bohio anrl Caritaba — ■ 
Las Casas. 

10 



82 FIRST VOYAGE 

were favorable to proceed to the above-mention- 
ed island of Babeque ; the other was, that were 
there any large towns near the sea, they might 
easily be discovered, but in case they were far 
up the rivers, they could only be reached by 
ascending the stream in small vessels, which those 
of his fleet were not. A desire, therefore, not 
to waste time, determined him not to explore 
these rivers, the last of which was surrounded 
with a well peopled country ; he named it Rio 
del Sol* He states that the Sunday previous, 
he had thought it Avould be well to take a few 
of the natives from the place where the ships 
lay, for the purpose of carrying them to Spain, 
that they might acquire our language, and inform 
us what their country contained, besides becom- 
ing Christians and serving us at their return as 
interpreters, 'for I have observed,' says he, 
' that these people have no religion, neither are 
they idolaters, but are a very gentle race, with- 
out the knowledge of any iniquity ; they neither 
kill, nor steal, nor carry weapons, and are so 
timid that oue of our men might put a hundred 
of them to flight, although they will readily sport 
and play tricks with them. They have a knowl- 
edge that there is a God above, and are firmly 
persuaded that we have come from heaven. 

* Puerto del Padre. 



OF COLUMBUS. 83 

They very quickly learn such prayers as we re- 
peat to them, and also to make the sign of the 
cross. Your Highnesses should therefore adopt 
the resolution of converting: them toChristianitv, 
in which enterprise, I am of opinion that a very 
short space of time would suffice to gain to our 
holy faith multitudes of people, and to Spain, 
great riches and immense dominions, with all 
their inhabitants; there being, without doubt, in 
these countries vast quantities of gold, for the 
indians would not without cause give us such de- 
scriptions of places where the inhabitants dug it 
from the earth, and wore it in massy bracelets 
at their necks, ears, legs, and arms. Here are 
also pearls and precious stones, and an infinite 
amount of spices. In the river de Mares which 
1 left last evening, there is undoubtedly a great 
deal of mastick, and the quantity might be in- 
creased, for the trees transplanted, easily take 
root ; they are of a lofty size, bearing leaves and 
fruit like the lentisk; the tree, however is taller 
and has a larger leaf than the lentisk, as is men- 
tioned by Pliny, and as I have myself observed 
in the island of Scio in the Archipelago. I or- 
dered many of these trees to be tapped in or- 
der to extract the resin, but as the weather was 
rainy all the time I was in the river, I was una- 
ble to procure more than a very small portion, 
which I have preserved for vour Highnesses. It 



84 FIRST VOYAGE 

is possible also that this is not the proper 
season for collecting it, which, it is likely, may be 
in the spring, when they begin to put forth their 
blossoms ; at present the fruit upon them is near- 
ly ripe. Great quantities of cotton might be 
raised here, and sold, as I think, profitably, with- 
out being carried to Spain, but to the cities 
of the Great Can, which we shall doubtless 
discover, as well as many others belonging to 
other sovereigns ; these may become a source 
of profit to your Highnesses by trading thither 
with the productions of Spain and the other 
European countries. Here also is to be found 
abundance of aloe, which however is not a 
thing of very great value, but the mastick 
assuredly is, being met with no where else 
except in the before-mentioned island of Scio, 
where if I remember rightly it is produced 
to the amount of fifty thousand ducats value in 
a year. The mouth of this river forms the best 
harbour I have yet seen, being wide, deep and 
free from shoals, with a fine situation for a town 
and fortification where ships may lie close along 
the shore, the land high, with a good air and fine 
streams of water. Yesterday a canoe came to 
the ship with six young men, five of them came on 
board, whom I ordered to be detained, and have 
them with me ; I then sent ashore to one of the 
houses, and took seven women and three children: 
this I did that the indians might tolerate their 



OP COLUMBUS. 85 

captivity better with their company, for it has 
often happened that the Portuguese have carri- 
ed the natives from Guinea to Portugal, for the 
purpose of learning their language, and when 
this was done, and they returned with them to 
Guinea, expecting by reason of the good treat- 
ment they had showed them, and the presents 
they had given them, to find great benefit in 
their use, they have gone among their own peo- 
ple and never appeared more. Others have done 
differently, and by keeping their wives, have 
assured themselves of their possession. Besides, 
these women will be a great help to us in acquir- 
ing their language, which is the same throughout 
all these countries, the inhabitants keeping up a 
communication among the islands by means of 
their canoes. This is not the case in Guinea, 
where there are a thousand different dialects, 
one tribe not understanding another. This eve- 
ning came on board, the husband of one of the 
women, and father of the three children, which 
were a boy and two girls, he intreated me to 
let him accompany them, which I very willingly 
granted ; the natives whom I had taken from 
here, were all so delighted at this as to induce 
me to think them his relations. He is a person 
of about forty-five years of age.' All this is in 
the exact words of the Admiral ; he also says 
that he found the weather somewhat cold, and 



«U 



86 FIRST VOYAGE 

being in the winter, thought it not advisable to 
prosecute his discoveries any farther towards the 
north* This day, Monday, they sailed by sun- 
set, eighteen leagues, East by South, to a cape 
which he named Cabo de Cnba:\ 

Tuesday, Nov. 13th. All night beat up and 
down making no progress, which was done for 
the purpose of examining a gap between two 
lofty mountains which they had noticed at sunset, 
and which seemed to be a separation between 
the land of Cuba and that of Bohio,% this the In- 
dians on board signified to them in the usual way. 
At daylight they stood towards the land, and 
passed a point which appeared at night about 
two leagues in extent ; they then entered a spa- 
cious gulf five leagues to the SSE., and saw a 
cape five leagues further onward where, between 
two high mountains there was discernible a large 
gap: whether this was a strait of the sea, they 
could not determine; and because the Admiral 
was anxious to proceed on to the island they 
called Babeque, where, as he understood there 
was much gold, and this island was to the East, 
he put out to sea, perceiving no shelter on the 

* From what he here relates, it appears that had he 
proceeded Northerly he would undoubtedly, in two days, 
have discovered Florida. — Las Casas. 

t Puntade Mulas. 

t Sierras del Cristal St Sierras del Moa. 



OP COLUMBUS. 87 

coast from the violence of the wind, which blew 
more strongly than ever ; they kept on their 
course East, with the wind from the North, 
eight miles an hour, till sunset, when they had 
sailed fifty-six miles, which are fourteen leagues, 
East from Cabo de Cuba. Of the coast of Bohio, 
which was to leeward, they had viewed appar- 
ently eighty miles, or twenty leagues, beginning 
at the cape of the gulf above mentioned. All 
this coast runs ESE. and WiNW. 

Wednesday, Nov. 14th. Stood off and on 
during the night, not judging it safe to sail among 
the islands in the dark. The indians informed 
them yesterday that the distance from Rio de 
Mares to the island of Babcque was three days 
voyage, this of course was to be understood of a 
voyage in their canoes, which go about seven 
leagues in a day. The wind was light, and 
though their direction was East, it would not 
allow them to steer within a point of this 
course y these, and other hindrances which are 
related, kept them from making any progress be- 
fore morning. At sunrise the Admiral, in con- 
sequence of the wind having shifted from N. to 
NE. determined to steer for the land, and seek 
a harbour, and in the event of not mooting with 
one, to return to that he last quitted. Having 
gone that night twenty-four miles East by South, 
he stood South for the land, and arriving near. 



88 FIRST VOYAGE 

saw many harbours, inlets, and islands; the wind 
blowing strong with a high sea, he did not dare 
risk an entrance into either of them, but kept 
along the coast NW. by W., still looking out for 
a harbour : a great many were seen, but none of 
them appeared safe; having gone in this manner 
sixty-four miles, they came to a very deep en- 
trance, a quarter of a mile wide, with a river, 
forming a good haven,* here they entered and 
found it spacious and deep, containing so many 
islands that they could not be counted, these 
were of a good size and lofty, covered with 
palm and other trees of a thousand different 
sorts. The Admiral was struck with admiration 
at viewing so many islands of such a height, and 
declares to the King and Queen that he believes 
there are not higher mountains in the world than 
those which he saw along the coast, and among 
these islands, and that none equal them in beau- 
ty, they being without clouds or snow. At the 
feet of these mountains there is great depth of 
water. He states it as his opinion that these 
islands are the innumerable ones which in the 
maps, are placed at the extremity of the East,t 
and says he believes they contain great riches, 

* Probably Puerto de Tanamo, in Cuba. 

| In the map of Martin de Behem, drawn up in 1492, 
and published by Mur and Cladera, a great multitude of 
islands are laid down, at the eastern limit of India. 



OF COLUMBUS. 89 

precious stones, and spicery, and extend far to 
the South, spreading out on each side. He 
named this place La Mar deJVuestra Senora, and 
the harbour near the strait which is the entrance 
to these islands, he called Puerto del Principe, of 
which he made no further survey than by view- 
ing it from without, till he returned to it on the 
Saturday of the following week, as will after- 
wards appear. The Admiral dilates very much 
upon the fertility, beauty and loftiness of these 
islands, and cautions the king and queen not to be 
surprised at the great admiration he expresses, for 
as he assures them he does not represent a hund- 
redth part of the truth. Some of these moun- 
tains appeared to reach to the skies, and were 
shaped like the points of diamonds, and others 
very lofty with table summits. A great depth of 
water was at their feet, so that the largest car- 
rack,* might lie there. None of them were 
rocky, but all covered with wood. 

Thursday, Nov. 15th. The Admiral went with 
the boats to visit the islands, of which he gives 
a wonderful description, and says he found mas- 
tick and great abundance of aloe. Some of the 
islands were cultivated with the roots which 
the indians use in making their bread. Fire was 
found burning in several places, but they met 

* A ship of the largest size. 
11 



90 FIRST VOYAGE 

with no fresh water. A few inhabitants were 
seen, who fled. They found the water in depth 
from fifteen to sixteen fathoms, with a sandy 
bottom, and no rocks, a very desirable thing to 
mariners, as these last are very dangerous in 
cutting the cables. 

Friday, Nov. 16th. They made it a practice 
in all those countries and islands, on going on 
shore, to set up and leave there, a cross. The 
Admiral went in the boat to the mouth of this port, 
and upon a point of land, found two large trunks 
of trees, of different sizes, laid across each other 
in the shape of a cross, so exactly that he says a 
carpenter could not have done the thing with more 
precision ; having paid their adorations to this, 
he ordered that these trunks should be taken and 
made into a large and lofty crucifix. Canes were 
found about the shore, but they could not dis- 
cover where they grew. The Admiral thought 
they had floated down some river, and were 
washed ashore, and in this he was right. They 
entered a cove or inlet within the entrance of 
the port toward the South East ; here they 
found a rocky promontory with a very bold shore, 
where the largest carrack in the world might 
lie close to the land, with a recess or corner in 
which half a dozen ships might lie without an- 
chors as in a dock. This appeared to him a conve- 
nient situation for a fortress, in case these islands 



OF COLUMBUS. 91 

should ever become a great mart of trade. Re- 
turning to the ship, he found the indians on board 
fishing for cockles, which are found of a large size 
in these seas. He made the crew dive here and 
search for button-shells which are the cockles in 
Avhich pearls are found ; they succeeded in obtain- 
ing many of them, but no pearls ; this he thought 
was owing to the season being unfit, and was of 
opinion that the proper time must be in JVIay and 
June. The sailors found a creature which ap- 
peared like a taso. They fished with nets and 
took a fish among others resembling a hog, to- 
tally covered with a shell of exceeding hardness, 
being soft nowhere except at the eyes and tail. 
The Admiral directed it to be preserved by salt- 
ing, as a curiosity. 

Saturday, Nov. 17th. The Admiral went on 
board the boat in the morning for the purpose of 
visiting the islands in the South West, which 
had not been surveyed. A great number were 
discovered, very fertile and of a beautiful appear- 
ance, with the water very deep among them ; in 
several of these, streams of fresh water were seen 
running down to the sea, which were thought to 
proceed from springs among the mountains. Pro- 
ceeding onward, they came to a fine river of fresh 
water, which was found to be very cool ; here was 
also a delightful meadow, with great numbers 
of palm trees more loftv than anv they had yet 



92 FIRST VOYAGE 

seen ; according to the Admiral's relation they 
found nutmegs here, and large indian mice, also 
craw-fish of a large size. Great flocks of birds 
were seen, and they smelt a powerful odour of 
musk, which article, they entertained no doubt, 
was to be met with in these parts. This day 
the two oldest of the indians which had been 
taken at Rio de Mares, and sent on board the 
Nina made their escape. 

Sunday, Nov. 18th. The Admiral with many 
of the crew, went in the boats to land, for th« 
purpose of setting up the cross which had been 
made from the logs beforementioned : this was 
done at the entrance of Puerto del Principe, where 
was selected a beautiful spot, clear of wood, for 
the situation : it was a lofty elevation and afford- 
ed an enchanting prospect. He says that the sea 
here ebbs and flows much more than at any 
other place he has visited in these countries ; this 
he thinks must be ascribed to the multitude of 
islands in the neighbourhood. The tide, he 
informs us is the reverse of what it is among us, 
for when the moon is SW. by S. it is low water 
in this port. Being Sunday they remained here 
through the day. 

Monday, Nov. 19th. Set sail before sunrise, 
but met with a calm. At noon it began to blow 
a little from the east, and they steered NNE ; 
at sunset Puerto del Principe bore SSW. seven 



OF COLUMBUS. 93 

leagues distant. They came in sight of the island 
of Babeque, which bore exactly east, at the dis- 
tance of sixty miles. They sailed all night with 
a light wind, making a progress of sixty miles, 
and at ten o'clock the next day, they had com- 
pleted a dozen more, which amount to eighteen 
leagues in the direction of NE. by N. 

Tuesday, Nov. 20th. The island or islands of 
Babeque bore ESE., from which quarter the 
wind blew, being of course ahead. Seeing no 
prospect of the wind's shifting, and the sea being 
high, the Admiral resolved to put about and re- 
turn to Puerto del Principe, from whence they had 
last sailed, and which was distant twenty-five 
leagues. He was unwilling to proceed to 
the island he had named lsabela, which 
was about a dozen leagues off, and where he 
might have anchored that day, for two reasons, 
the one, because he saw two islands to the south, 
which he wished to examine, the other because 
he feared that the indians on board, which he had 
taken from San Salvador or Guanahani as the 
natives called it, might effect their escape, as that 
island was only eight leagues distant from lsabela, 
this he was desirous to prevent, as he wished to 
carry them to Spain. The indians as he informs 
us, were given to understand that in case the 
Spaniards met with gold they intended to set 
them at liberty. They arrived near Puerto del 



FIKST VOYAGE 



Principe, but were unable to enter, on account of 
the night, besides that the current carried them 
to the North West. They then put about and 
stood to the North East, under a strong breeze, 
which, however, abated about the third watch of 
the night, when they steered East by North; the 
wind had changed to SSE., and at dawn it shifted 
again to South. At sunrise they found Puerto del 
Principe to bear nearly SW. by W., forty-eight 
miles or twelve leagues distant. 

Wednesday, Nov. 21st. As soon as the sun 
had risen, they stood to the East with a Souther- 
ly wind ; the currents being contrary, they made 
but little progress : towards evening they had 
gone twenty-four miles, when the wind shifted 
to the East, and they steered South by East, and 
by sunset sailed a dozen miles. Here the Ad- 
miral found their latitude to be twenty-one de- 
grees North, as at Puerto de Mares, but says he 
shall make no further use of his quadrant, till he 
arrives on shore, where he shall repair it. It 
appeared to him that they were not in reality so 
far to the North, and in this opinion he was 
right. He was induced to think the quadrant 
was correct by observing that the north star ap- 
peared as high as in Castile, and if this was the 
fact, he must have been in as high a latitude as 
Florida, in this case what is the situation of the 
islands he has been mentioning ? Moreover he 



OP COLUMBUS. 95 

states that the heat was excessive, but it is clear 
that if he had been upon the coast of Florida he 
would not have found it hot but cold, as it is man- 
ifest that in no part of the world is a great heat 
experienced in such a latitude except by some 
accidental cause, and even this I believe has 
never been known.* This excessive heat which 

* It is not easy to understand these remarks of Las 
Casas. In this instance, as well as in the two preceding, 
where the latitude of places has been specified, it is given 
twenty-one degrees in the translation, although the state- 
ment of Columbus is forty-two : as the Spanish editor re- 
marks in a note upon the first of these passages, that the 
quadrants in use at that time measured by double altitude, 
and by consequence forty-two degrees of the computation 
of Columbus are to be understood as half that number ac- 
tual distance from the equator, it was thought proper to 
make the alterations above stated, especially as from a 
knowledge of the localities referred to, it appears that half 
the equatorial distance given in the original, is the true 
latitude of those places. From the observation, however, 
of Columbus, respecting the appearance of the polar star, 
one would be led to imagine that he supposed himself in 
reality as far North as forty-two degrees, and it would seem 
from what is observed by Las Casas — namely that in the lat- 
itude specified by the Admiral, the excessive heat which 
he mentions, could not have existed, — that he understood 
the actual distance North to be as great as that expressed 
in the Journal : it would be surprising, if this were the 
fact, that Las Casas, who had made several voyages to 
America, should be totally ignorant of the methods of nau- 
tical calculation. Besides, the notion that he believed the 
latitude mentioned, to be really what the numbers express, 
is irreconcilable with his observation that their distance 
from the equator would have been in the parallel of Flor- 
ida. Now this part of the continent was early discovered, 
and its true situation very well known when Las Casas 



FIRST VOYAGE 



the Admiral says they suffered, indicates that 
in these Indies and in the parts were they were 
sailing there must be a great deal of gold. To- 
day Martin Alonzo Pinzon, in the caravel Pinta, 
left the other ships, without leave of the Admi- 
ral, incited by his cupidity, upon the occasion of 
an indian on board his vessel offering to direct 
him whither he might find much gold. Thus he 
abandoned them without any excuse of necessity, 
or stress of weather, and the Admiral remarks, 
; he has by language and actions, occasioned me 
many other troubles.' 

Thursday, Nov. 22d. Last night, sailed South 
by East, with an easterly wind, which, however, 
blew very little. At the third watch it began to 
blow from the NNE. ; they continued their 
course southerly, to examine the land which they 
saw in that quarter, and at sunrise found them- 
selves as far distant from it, as they were the day 
before, by reason of the contrary currents ; the 
land was forty miles distant. Martin Alonzo 
steered to the East for the island of Babeque 

wrote, so that no possibility exits of his supposing it to be 
so far North as forty-two degrees, and this writer himself 
remarks in a note which has already been given, that two 
days sail farther North from the coast of Cuba would have 
carried our navigator to that country. That the polar star 
could have been little more than half as high as it is seen 
in Spain, it is hardly necessary to observe. It does not ap- 
pear how the statement of the Admiral respecting its ap- 
pearance can be accounted for. 



OP COLUMBUS. 97 

where the indians told him there was much gold ; 
he was in sight of the Admiral, about sixteen 
miles off. All night the Admiral stood towards 
the land, having taken in some of the sails, and 
carrying a light, as he thought the Pinta was 
steering towards him. The night was clear, and 
there was a fine breeze which might have ena- 
bled her to come up, had her commander been 
so disposed. 

Friday, Nov. 23. Kept on their course South 
towards the land with a light wind ; the current 
set so strong against them, that they made no 
progress ahead, but found themselves at sunset, 
where they had been in the morning. The wind 
was ENE. and favorable for sailing to the South, 
except that it was light. Beyond the cape which 
they saw before them, extended out another head- 
land toward the East, which the indians on board 
called Bohio, and said it was very large, and con- 
tained inhabitants with one eye in their foreheads 
and others which they called Canibales, and 
spoke of them with many marks of fear; as soon 
as they saw the ships were taking that course 
they were struck with terror, and signified that 
the people went armed, and would devour them. 
The Admiral declares that he believes there is 
some truth in their representations, but thinks that 
these people described as possessing arms, must 
be a race of some sagacity, and that having 
12 



98 FIRST VOYAGE 

made prisoners of some of the other Indians, 
their friends not finding them to return, conclud- 
ed they had eaten them. This, in fact, was the 
opinion entertained of the Spaniards by some of 
the natives at their first arrival. 

Saturday, Nov. 24th. Sailed all night, and at 
three o'clock in the morning, arrived at a low 
flat island,* being the same which they had visit- 
ed the week before in their voyage to the island 
of Babeque. At first the Admiral was unwilling 
to approach the shore, as it appeared to him 
that the sea rendered it unsafe. At length he 
proceeded to the gulf which he had named La 
Mar de Nuestra Senora, where the multitude of 
islands was discovered : Here he entered the 
harbour which is situated at the entrance of the 
strait. He says, that had he before known of 
the existence of this harbour, and had not occu- 
pied himself with visiting the islands in the gulf, 
he should not have found it necessary to put 
back, although he looks upon the time as well 
bestowed in exploring the islands. Arrived at 
the land, he dispatched the boat and sounded 
the harbour, the entrance was found from six 
to twenty fathoms deep, with a fine sandy bot- 
tom. He then sailed up the harbour with the 
ships, steering southwest and afterwards west, 
the low island abovementioned bearing northerly 

* Cayo de Moa. 



OF COLUMBUS. 99 

and forming with another island a port sufficient 
to contain all the ships in Spain,* where they 
might lie without moorings perfectly safe from 
all winds. The entrance here is from the south- 
east, and there is an outlet toward the west, 
very broad and deep, so that these islands may be 
sailed between, and examined by any one coming 
from the north. They are at the foot of a high 
mountaint which extends a considerable distance 
from East to West, and is the longest and most 
lofty among the infinite number which are to be 
found upon this coast. A ridge of rock runs 
along at the foot of the mountain toward the 
entrance of the strait. Toward the Southeast, 
and in the direction, of the low island, there is 
another reef, but small ; between them the wa- 
ter is very deep and the passage wide, as is 
before remarked. Within the entrance at the 
Southeast, they discovered a riverj very fair 
and wide, and of greater volume than any they 
had yet seen. The water was fresh quite to 
the sea. It had a bar at its mouth, but a good 
depth of eight or nine fathoms inside. The land 
here, as elsewhere, was totally covered with 
palm and other trees. 



* This is either the harbour of Santa Catalina, or more 
probably that of Cayo de Moa, to which it is said, the 
description in the text exactly answers. These places are 
in the eastern extremity of Cuba. 

| Sierras de Moa. J Rio de Moa. 



a ■ 



100 FIRST VOYAGE 

Sunday, Nov. 25. Before sunrise the Admi- 
ral went in tile boat to view a cape or point of 
land* to the Southeast of the low island, about 
a league and a half distant, as it appeared to hitn 
there was in that quarter some convenient river. 
About two bow shots from the cape to the 
Southeast, he discovered a fine stream running 
down a mountain!" with loud murmurs. He pro- 
ceeded towards it, and found in the stream cer- 
tain stones which shone with spots of a golden 
hue ;J recollecting that gold was found in the 
river Tagus near the sea, he entertained no 
doubt that this was the metal, and directed that 
a collection of these stones should be made to 
carry to the King and Queen. While they were 
about this, the ship-boys cried out that they saw 
pine trees; the Admiral looked towards the 
mountain, and discovered pines of such loftiness 
and admirable shape, that he found it impossible 
to exaggerate in the description of them, their 
trunks being tall and straight to a marvel. Here, 
he perceived that there might be procured 
masts, plank, and every such material for build- 
ing the largest ships. Here were also oaks and 
strawberry-trees, a convenient stream and good 
site for saw-mills; the land was high, and the 

* Punta del Mangle or del Guarico. 

| Sierras de Moa. 

J Piedras de Margarita, according to Las Casas. 



OP COLUMBUS. 101 

air the most agreeable they had yet met with. 
Many stones of a ferruginous colour were found 
along the shore, and others which some of the 
men said, came out of silver mines; all these 
were brought down by the stream. They pro- 
cured from the forest, a yard and mizen-mast for 
the caravel Nina. Proceeding to the mouth of 
the river, they put into a bay* at the foot of the 
cape at the Southeast, which they found spa- 
cious and deep, and capable of containing a hun- 
dred ships without anchors or moorings; a finer 
port than this they had never seen. The moun- 
tains were remarked very lofty, with many fine 
streams running down their sides ; all were cov- 
ered with forests of pines and other beautiful 
trees. Two or three other rivers were seen. 
The whole he describes to the King and Queen 
with much enthusiasm : the pines especially, it 
gave him inexpressible joy to behold, as they 
afforded the means of building any desirable 
number of ships. He cannot represent, as he 
affirms, the hundredth part of what he saw, and 
declares that it pleased our Lord to go on dis- 
covering to him, things more and more valuable; 
and in all that had been met with, the countries, 
their productions and inhabitants, things had 
grown better and better. He adds that himself 
who saw these wonders, being struck with such 

' Puerto de Jaragrua. 



102 FIRST VOYAGE 

admiration, much greater must be caused in one 
who only hears of them, and that none would be- 
lieve the accounts of these things, unless they 
saw them. 

Monday, Nov. 26. At sunrise they weighed 
anchor, and set sail from the harbour of Santa 
Catalina within the low island j they proceeded 
along the coast with a light breeze from the 
Southwest, towards Cabo del Pico* at the South- 
east, and arrived at the cape late in the after- 
noon, the wind having died away ; they espied 
in the direction of Southeast by East, another 
cape about sixty miles distant ; nearer the ship 
was a third, which bore Southeast by South, 
apparently twenty miles distant, this the Admi- 
ral named Cabo de Campanarf they could not 
reach it before night, as the wind failed them. 
They sailed this day thirty-two miles, which are 
eight leagues : in this course they saw and mark- 
ed down, nine very remarkable harbours, which 
the mariners affirmed to be excellent, also five 
large rivers were seen, the ships keeping close 
along the coast for the purpose of making a full 
survey. The land seemed to consist entirely of 
very lofty mountains of a delightful appearance, 
not rocky or barren, but smooth and abounding 
in beautiful valleys, the whole most enchantingly 
covered with tall and flourishing; trees, among 

* Punta del Mangle, or Guarico. \ Punta Vaez. 



OP COLUMBUS. 103 

which appeared to be many pines. Beyond 
Cabo del Pico, toward the Southeast, were a 
couple of islets each of about two leagues in 
circuit, and within these, three fine harbours, 
and two large rivers. No towns were seen along 
the coast, although there were probably many 
in these parts, to judge from the indications they 
met with, for wherever they went on shore, they 
found fires burning, and other signs of inhabitants. 
The Admiral thought the land that was seen to 
the Southeast of Cabo de Campana, was the is- 
land called by the indians Bofuo, as it appeared to 
be separated from the main land. All the na- 
tives whom they had hitherto met with seemed 
to entertain a great dread of the people of the 
place they called Caniba or Canima, and stated 
that they resided in this island of Bohio, which 
the Admiral says must be a very large one, and 
thinks that the inhabitants plunder the lands 
and houses of the other indians, who are very 
cowardly and are ignorant of weapons, It is on 
this account that he supposes the indians are 
afraid to build their houses near the sea, in the 
vicinity of their enemies. He relates that the 
indians on board, when they perceived the Span- 
iards were directing their course thither, were 
struck speechless with terror, thinking they should 
be devoured; these apprehensions they were una- 
ble to shake off, but persisted in affirming that the 
men of this country had the faces of dogs, with 



104 FIRST VOYAGE 

only one eye; this the Admiral did not believe, 
and was of opinion that these people who made 
prisoners of the other Indians, belonged to the 
Great Can. 

Tuesday, Nov. 27th. At sunset last night 
they approached the cape which they had 
named Cabo de Campana, and as the sky was 
clear and the wind light, the Admiral thought it 
best not to anchor, although there were five or 
six excellent ports to leeward. This he was in- 
cited to do by his wish to make up the time he 
had spent in lingering about and viewing the 
beautiful places he had passed. On this account 
they beat up and down all night, during which 
time the currents carried them along five or six 
leagues to the Southeast. Beyond Cabo de 
Campana they discovered a large strait which 
appeared to make a division in the land, with 
what seemed to be an island in the middle. The 
wind being Southwest, the Admiral determined 
to put about, and examine it. On arriving thither 
it was found to be a large bay ;* at the South- 
easterly extremity was a lofty promontory of a 
square shape, which appeared like an island. t 
The wind shifted to the North, and they stood 
about, and steered Southeast, for the purpose of 
making; discoveries alone; the coast. At the foot 
of the cape called Cabo de Campana they found 

* Baracoa. | Monte del Yunque. 



OF COLUMBUS. 105 

an excellent harbour* and large river; a mile 
beyond, another river, half a league further, a 
third river; and another half a league onward, a 
fourth. Four additional rivers were seen with- 
in the distance of as many leagues, the last of 
them about twenty miles from Cabo de Campana, 
to the S.E. The most of these had safe en- 
trances of great breadth and depth, and form ex- 
cellent harbours for large ships, being free from 
rocks, shoals and reefs. Standing along the 
coast they discovered at the SE. of the last river 
a large town,t which exceeded in size any they 
had hitherto seen; a vast multitude of people 
came down to the sea shore shouting loudly ; they 
were all naked and had javelins in their hands. 
The Admiral desired to have some conversation 
with them, and ordered the sails to be lowered ; 
they came to anchor and the boats were dis- 
patched on shore with such preparation and or- 
der, that the indians should neither receive any 
injury, nor cause any to the Spaniards. Some 
trifles were sent in the boats for distribution 
among them. Those on shore made a show of 
attempting to prohibit the landing of the Span- 
iards, but perceiving the boats fearlessly ap- 
proaching the land they retired to a distance. 
The Spaniards thinking that a small number of 

t Puerto del Maravi. t Baraooa 

13 



106 FIRST VOYAGE 

the crew might approach thera without causing 
any fear, three of their number advanced to- 
wards the indians, calling out to them in the In- 
dian language, (which they had learnt in some 
degree from those on board) not to be afraid, not- 
withstanding this they took to flight, leaving not 
a soul behind. The Spaniards proceeded to the 
houses, which were built of straw, after the man- 
ner of the others, but found neither inhabitants 
nor furniture. They returned to the ships and 
set sail at noon for a pleasant cape,* which they 
saw at the East, about eight leagues distant. 
Having sailed half a league in the bay, they de- 
scried toward the South a very singular har- 
bour.! The country at the SE. presented a most 
delightful view, descending in an open plain from 
the mountains. Large towns, and the smoke of 
many fires were seen, and the land appeared to 
be well cultivated. These determined the Ad- 
miral to put into the harbour above mentioned, 
and attempt some intercourse Avilh the people. 
This harbour he declares to be far superior to all 
he had yet seen, for the populousness and beauty 
of the country in the neighborhood, and the 
fineness of the air. He speaks in terms of ad- 
miration of the beauty of the fields and the 
forests, among which were pines and palm- 

* Ponta deMaifi. t Puerto de Baracoa. 



OF COLUMBUS. 107 

trees. The plain before-mentioned extended to 
the SE., with an undulating surface and many 
streams crossing it which run down from the 
mountains, altogether forming the most beautiful 
prospect in the world. Having anchored, the 
Admiral went in the boat to sound the harbour, 
which was of a circular shape, and at the mouth 
of it toward the South he found the entrance of 
a stream, wide enough to admit a galley ; this 
was so situated as not to be seen before arriving 
close to the spot. At a distance of the length 
of the boat within, there were found eight fath- 
oms depth of water. Proceeding up the stream 
he was astonished to perceive the fresh and lux- 
uriant verdure of the trees, the clearness of the 
water, the variety of the birds, and the beauty 
of the whole prospect, and declares he was never 
willing to leave the place. He observed to the 
crew who accompanied him that a thousand 
tongues would be insufficient to inform the King 
and Queen of what they saw there, or a thou- 
sand hands to describe them, and that he ap- 
peared to be under the influence of enchantment. 
He was desirous that other persons of prudence 
and credit should be witnesses of them, and says 
he is certain their descriptions will not fall short 
of his. He adds these words, ' it is indubitable 
sovereign Princes, that in such countries there 
must be fhing= of infinite vnlue. and the profits 



108 FIRST VOYAGE 

that may be acquired here I am not able to de- 
scribe. 1 am unwilling to remain long in any 
port, but desire to visit all the lands in this quar- 
ter, that I may give a relation of them to your 
Highnesses. The language of this people neither 
I nor any of my company understand, and we are 
perpetually making mistakes in our conversation 
with one another. I place little confidence in 
the indians I have on board, as they have sev- 
eral times attempted to escape. Henceforth, 
with the permission of our Lord, I shall use my 
exertions, and have the language taught to some 
of our people, for I perceive that thus far the 
dialect is the same throughout. Thus we shall 
acquire a knowledge of all that is valuable here, 
and shall endeavour to convert to Christianity 
these people, which may be easily done as they 
are not idolators, but are without any religion. 
Your Highnesses may order a city and fortress 
to be built here, and possess the country. And 
I assure your Highnesses that, to my thinking, 
there are not under the sun better lands, consid- 
ering the fertility of the soil, the temperature of 
the air and the abundance of fine streams of wa- 
ter, which are not pestilent, like the rivers of 
Guinea, for, praised be our Lord, there has not 
as yet been one among all my crews brought 
upon his bed by sickness, or even afflicted with 
so much as a headache, excepting an old man who 



OF COLUMBUS. 109 

was troubled for two days with the stone, a dis- 
order which he has possessed all his life. Please 
God your Highnesses may send learned men 
hither, who may ascertain the truth of all 1 de- 
scribe. And as I have before spoken of a situa- 
tion for a town and fortress at the Rio de Mares, 
where there is a fine port and a pleasant country 
in the neighborhood, I repeat what I then affirm- 
ed in recommendation of that place ; but it is 
certain that neither that situation, nor the Mar de 
JVucstra Senora can, in any degree be compared 
to this, for here are undoubtedly large towns^ 
multitudes of people, and things of great value. 
All these countries which I have seen, and which 
I expect to discover, before my return to Castile, 
will, in my opinion offer a vast trade to Europe, 
and especially to Spain, to which they must all 
necessarily be subject. Your Highnesses ought 
not to suffer any trade to be carried on, nor a for- 
eign foot to be set upon these shores except by 
catholic Christians, as the object and sum of the 
present undertaking has been the increase and 
glory of the Christian religion.' All these are the 
words of the Admiral. 

They proceeded up the river, w r hich they 
found to possess several branches, and then row- 
ing round the harbour they saw at the mouth of 
the river several delightful groves, and a very 
fine canoe made of a log, as large as a fusta of 



1 10 FIRST VOYAGE 

twelve oars, it was hauled up under a shed 
constructed with wood and covered with palm 
leaves in such a manner that it was completely 
sheltered from the rain and sun. The Admiral 
declares this to he an excellent place for a town 
and fort on account of the advantages of the har- 
bour, streams and soil, and the plenty of wood, 
and pleasantness of the country. 

Wednesday, Nov. 28th. They remained in 
port all day on account of the rain, although the 
wind blowing from the S W., they might have 
sailed along the coast. But as the thickness of 
the weather would have hindered the view of 
the land, the Admiral thought best to remain, 
especially considering the danger in not being ac- 
quainted with the coast. The crews went on 
shore to wash their clothes, and some of them 
went a distance into the country ; they found 
large villages with the houses empty, the natives 
having fled. They discovered another river, 
larger than that at the harbour. 

Thursday, Nov. 29th. As it continued to rain 
and the sky was completely covered with clouds, 
they did not set sail. Some of the Spaniards 
went to visit a town toward the NW., and found 
in the houses neither inhabitants nor furniture. 
On the way they met with an old man who was 
unable to escape, him they took, assuring him of 
their friendly disposition, and after presenting 



OP COLUMBUS. Ill 

him with some trifles, allowed him to depart. 
The Admiral was desirous of seeing him, in order 
that he might give him some clothes, and have 
some conversation with him, for he was much 
delighted with the country and judged it to be 
very populous. They found a cake cf wax* in 
one of the houses, which they preserved for the 
King and Queen, and the Admiral was of opin- 
ion that where wax was found there must be a 
great many other valuable commodities. In one 
of the houses was likewise found a man's head 
hanging from a beam in a small covered bas- 
ket ; the like they found in a house in one of 
the other villages. The Admiral thought these 
were heads of the principal men, as the houses 
in which they were met with were of a very 
large size, and that the persons to whom they 
belonged were relations. 

Friday, Nov. 30th. They could not put to sea, 
the wind being from the E. and contrary. The 
Admiral sent eight men armed, with two of the 
indians on board, to explore the country, and ob- 
tain some communication with the inhabitants. 
They came to many houses without finding.withiu 
them, person or thing, the inhabitants having fled. 
At length they discovered four young men dig- 
ging in the fields, who- perceiving the Spaniards, 

* This according to Las Cnsas must have come from 
.Vucatan. 



1 12 FIRST VOYAGE 

took to flight, and could not be overtaken. Thev 
travelled a considerable distance and saw a great 
many villages ; the land was very fertile and the 
whole under cultivation. Large streams of wa- 
ter were seen, and in the neighborhood of one, 
they saw a canoe very finely built of a single log, 
it was ninety-five spans in length, and capable of 
carrying a hundred and fifty men. 

Saturday, Dec. 1st. They remained still in port, 
the wind continuing ahead with rain in abun- 
dance. At the entrance of this harbour, which 
was named Puerto Santo* they set up a cross in 
the solid rock ; the point where this was done 
is in the southern part near the mouth, and who- 
ever wishes to sail into the port, should keep 
near the northwesterly point rather than the 
other, the depth at the foot of each being twelve 
fathoms close to the shore, and free from ob- 
structions; but at the entrance of the harbour 
near the southeasterly point there is a shoal 
which rises above the water, and so far from the 
shore that a vessel may pass between the point 
and it, in case of necessity. Round about the 
shoal irnd the point there is a depth of twelve and 
fifteen fathoms. Coming in, it is requisite to 

steer SW. 

Sunday, Dec. 2d. The wind still contrary, 

they could not depart, although every night there 
* Baracoa. 



OF COLUMBUS. 113 

blew a land-breeze. The Admiral states that 
there would be no danger of driving ashore in 
this harbour, in the most violent storms, by rea- 
son of the shoal at the entrance. In the mouth 
of the river a ship's boy found some stones which 
seemed to contain gold, these were preserved for 
the King and Queen. A lombarda shot from 
this place were large rivers. 

Monday, Dec. 3d. Still detained in port by 
the weather. The Admiral resolved to visit a 
fine cape which he saw a mile distant from the 
harbour at the SE. He accordingly went with 
the boats and some of the crew armed. At the 
foot of the cape he found the mouth of a pleasant 
river ;* they rowed to the SE. to enter it, and 
found it a hundred paces wide : the depth at the 
mouth was a fathom, but within increased to 
twelve, and there was room enough for all the 
ships in Spain. Passing a branch of the stream, 
they proceeded to the SE. and came to a creek 
or cove, in which they saw five large canoes, very 
handsomely wrought, like fustas. At the foot 
of the mountain they found the land all under 
cultivation. The woods were very thick, and in 
passing through them, they came to a shed very 
well built and tightly covered, so that neither 
sun nor rain could penetrate it : under it they 

* Rio Boma- 
14 



1 14 FIRST VOYAGE 

found a canoe made like the others, from a log, 
as large as a Justa of sixteen oars, it was well 
shaped, and very handsomely carved. They 
ascended a mountain and observed the country 
very level. Many productions were observed 
such as gourds and the like, and the fields offer- 
ed a delightful prospect. They came suddenly 
upon a large town, and all the inhabitants upon 
perceiving them immediately fled. The indian 
who accompanied the Spaniards called out to 
them not to fear, for they were friends. The 
Admiral caused them to be presented with 
hawk's bells, brass rings and strings of green and 
yellow glass-beads, with the which they were 
highly delighted. Having ascertained that they 
possessed no gold nor any precious commodity, 
the Spaniards returned to their boats. The 
country was found very populous, but the most of 
the inhabitants fled through fear. The Admiral 
declares to the King and Queen that these peo- 
ple are such cowards that ten men might put 
ten thousand of them to flight. They carry no 
weapons save sticks with the ends a little hard- 
ened in the fire, these were very easily obtain- 
ed from them. Arrived at the boats, two men 
weve sent off to a place where the Admiral 
thought he had seen a large bee-hive. Before 
their return, many Indians came to the boats 
where the Admiral was with his crew, and one 



OF COLUMBUS. 115 

of them jumper] into the river and came to the 
stern of the Admiral's boat where he made a 
long speech, nothing of which was understood, 
except that the other indians held up their hands 
to heaven from time to time, and uttered loud 
cries. The Admiral was of opinion that they 
were assuring him of the pleasure which his ar- 
rival gave them, but presently observed that the 
indian on board changed colour* and trembled 
exceedingly, entreating the Admiral by signs to 
leave the river, for the natives were about to 
kill them all. He then took a cross-bow from 
one of the Spaniards and held it out towards the 
indian, and uttered a speech which the Admiral 
understood to be a menace of hostility against 
them. He also seized a sword, and drawing it 
from the scabbard showed it to them, using the 
same language, which being heard by those on 
shore they all took to flight. The indian contin- 
ued trembling and overpowered with fear, al- 
though a stout, well made fellow. The Admiral 
determined not to leave the river, but rowed for 
the shore toward a place where he saw many 
people, all of them naked, and stained red, some 
with tufts of feathers in their heads, and all hav- 
ing javelins. ' I approached them' says he, ' and 
gave them some pieces of bread, demanding their 

* In the Spanish 'turned as yellow as wax.' 



116 



FIRST VOYAGE 



javelins, which they gave me for a hawk's bell to 
one, a little brass ring to another and a few beads 
to another. In this manner they were all paci- 
fied, and came to the boats offering their articles 
for any thing we chose to give them in return. 
A turtle had been killed, and the shell lay in 
pieces in the boat ; the ship-boys purchased the 
javelins of the indians with it, at the rate of a 
handful of them for a scale. These people are 
like the others I have seen, and imagine we 
have come from heaven. They are ready to 
barter any thing they possess for whatever we 
choose to give them, without objecting to the 
small value of it; and if they had spices or gold, 
I believe it would be the same. I saw here a 
handsome house of a moderate size, with two 
doors, as all the others are; I entered it and 
found a very singular contrivance in the manner 
of alcoves, which I cannot describe ; from the 
ceiling hung cockle shells and other things. I 
took it to be a temple, and called the indians, de- 
manding of them by signs whether they offered 
up their devotions there, to which they replied 
in the negative, and one of them climbed up, and 
gave me the ornaments which were hanging 
about ; some of them I accepted.' 

Tuesday, Dec. 4th. They set sail with a light 
wind, and left this harbour, which received the 
name of Puerto Santo. At two leagues distance 



OF COLUMBUS. 117 

they saw a fine river, mentioned yesterday.* 
Kept along the coast, and found it, after having 
passed a cape, to run ESE. and WN W., to a 
cape which they named Cabo Lindo\: this is five 
leagues E. by S. from another called Cabo del 
Monte, and a league and a half from the last is a 
river somewhat narrow, which appears to have 
a safe end deep entrance. Three miles from 
that, they saw another river, very large and 
which to appearance came from a distance, it 
was about a hundred paces wide, and eight 
fathoms deep, with a good entrance free from 
shoals ; the water was fresh to the sea ; these 
facts were learned by dispatching a boat to sound 
and examine it : the river appeared to bring as 
great a volume of water to the sea, as any they 
had seen, and probably had many towns on its 
banks. Beyond Cabo Undo there was a bay of 
considerable extent. 

Wednesday, Dec. 5th. All last night they lay 
to off Cabo Lindo, in order to examine the 
land which extended to the east, and at sunrise 
discovered another capef in that direction, 
two leagues and a half distant, which having 
passed, they found the coast began to tend to- 
ward the south and southwest§ and presently dis- 

* Rio Boma. f Punta del Frajle. 

J Punta de los Azules. 

§ This is the eastern extremity of Cuba, called Punta 
de Maici. 



118 FIRST VOYAGE 

covered a lofty and handsome cape in that direc- 
tion, about seven leagues from the last. The 
Admiral was inclined to steer that waj, but his 
desire to visit the island of Babeque, which ac* 
cording to the indians was to the northeast, re- 
strained him. The wind, however, blowing from 
the Northeast hindered him from steering that 
way ; preceeding onward, therefore, he descri- 
ed land in the southeast* which appeared to be 
quite a large island, and according to the infor- 
mation of the indians was very populous, and 
called Bohio. The inhabitants of Cuba or Juana, 
and those of the other islands entertained a great 
dread of these people, imagining them to be 
man-eaters. Other surprising relations the in- 
dians communicated by signs to the Spaniards, of 
which the Admiral does not avow his belief, but 
thinks the indians of Bohio to be a more inge- 
nious and artful race than the others, as they 
were accustomed to make prisoners of them. — 
The wind being northeast and inclining toward 
the north he determined to leave Cuba or Jutman 
which hitherto he had taken for a continent by 
its size, having sailed along the coast a hundred 
and twenty leagues. He therefore left the shore 
and steered southeast by east, as the land last 
discovered appeared in that direction. He took 

* Espanola. 



OP COLUMBUS. 119 

this course because the wind always came round 
from the north to northeast, and from thence to 
east and southeast. It blew hard and they car- 
ried all sail, having a smooth sea, and a current 
favoring them, so that from morning to one 
o'clock in the afternoon they sailed eight miles 
an hour, for nearly six hours ; the nights are stat- 
ed to be here nearly fifteen hours long. After 
this, they went ten miles an hour, and by sunset 
had made a progress of eighty-eight miles, which 
are twenty-two leagues, all to the southeast. As 
night was coming on the caravel Nina, being a 
swift sailer, was dispatched ahead to look out 
for a harbor ; she came to the mouth of one* 
which resembled the bay of Cadiz, and it being 
dark, they sent the boat to sound it ; the boat 
carried a light, and before the Admiral could 
come up with the Nina, who was beating up and 
down, waiting for the boat to make her a signal 
to enter, the light disappeared. Upon this she 
stood off to sea, making a light for the Admiral, 
and coming up they related what had happened. 
Presently the light on board the boat again ap- 
peared, when the Nina stood in for the land; 
the Admiral was not able to follow, but remained 
beating about all night. 

Thursday, Dec. 6th. At day break he fonnd 
himself four leagues from the harbour, which he 

* St. Nicholas in Espanola, 



120 FIRST VOYAGE 

named Puerto Maria, and saw a fine cape which 
bore south by west ; to this he gave the name of 
Cabo del Estrella* it was twenty eight miles dis- 
tant, and appeared to be the southern extremity 
of the island. There appeared land in the eastt 
like an island of a moderate size, about forty 
miles distant. Another handsome and finely 
shaped headland was seen bearing east by south, 
at a distance of fifty-four miles, this he called 
Cabo del Elefante.\ Another bore east south- 
east, twenty-eight miles off, which he named 
Cabo de Cinquin. A large opening or bay which 
seemed to be a river § was observed about twen- 
ty miles distant in the direction of southeast by 
east. There appeared to be between the two 
last mentioned capes a very wide channel|| which 
the sailors said separated an island from the main 
land; this island he named Torluga. The land 
here appeared lofty, and not mountainous but 
even and level like the finest arable tracts. The 
whole or great part of it seemed under cultiva- 
tion, and the plantations resembled the wheat 
fields in the plain of Cordova in the month of 
May. Many fires were seen during the night? 

* This is cape St. Nicholas. | A continuation of the coast. 
% Punta Palmista. § Puerto Escudo. 

j| Channel of Tortuga. 



GP COLUMBUS. 121 

and by day, a great number of smokes, which to 
appearance were signals giving notice of some 
people with whom they were at war. The 
whole coast runs to the east. In the evening 
the Admiral entered the abovementioned har- 

J) 

bor, which he named Puerto de San Nicolas, it 
being the day of that saint : he was astonished on 
entering, to observe the goodness and beauty of 
the harbour, and although he had highly praised 
the ports of Cuba, he declares that this is not 
inferior to any of them, but rather exceeds, and 
differs from them all. The entrance has a 
width of a league and a half, where a vessel 
should steer SSE. there being sufficient room 
to steer in any direction. It extends in this 
manner to the SSE. two leagues : Here is a 
fine beach with a river, and trees of a thou- 
sand sorts all loaded with fruit, which the Ad- 
miral took for spices and nutmegs, but being un- 
ripe he could not get any knowledge of them. 
T he water in this harbour is of a surprising depth* 
they not being able to reach bottom at a short 
distance from the shore with a line of forty fath- 
oms ; in other parts they found fifteen fathom?, 
and a clear bottom ; not a shoal is to be seen 
throughout the harbour, and the shore is so bold 
that an oar's length from it the water is five 
fathoms deep. Here is room sufficient for a 
thousand carracks to sail about in. At the SSE. 
15 



122 FIRST VOYAGE 

the harbour offers a recess opening towards the 
NE., of about half a league in depth, and pre- 
serving the same breadth throughout its whole 
extent. This is shut in after such a manner, 
that within it the main entrance of the harbour 
cannot be seen. The depth of the water is 
every where eleven fathoms, with a fine clean 
sand at the bottom ; the shore is bold, having 
eight fathoms water within a few feet distance. 
Here is a fine dry air, and the shore around free 
from wood. The land appeared the most rocky 
of any they had seen ; the trees small, and many 
similar to those of Spain, as evergreen oaks, and 
strawberry trees; the same they remarked of 
the herbs. Since they had been in this part of 
the world, they had not experienced so cool a 
temperature of the air as they found at this 
place. A beautiful plain lay opposite the en- 
trance of the harbour, through the midst of 
which flowed the river mentioned above. The 
neighbourhood, the Admiral thought to be ex- 
tremely populous, from the number and size of 
the canoes which were seen ; some of them 
were as large as a fusta of fifteen oars. The 
indians all took to flight on perceiving the ships. 
Those whom the Spaniards had on board grew 
so earnest to return to their homes that the Ad- 
miral says he had some intention of carrying 
them thither at his departure from this place, 



OP COLUMBUS. 123 

and that they were mistrustful of him for not 
taking his route that way. For this reason he 
declares that he put no trust in any of their rep- 
resentations, nor they in his. They appeared to 
have the greatest fear imaginable of the people 
of this island. The Admiral found that if he 
wished to obtain any communication with those 
on shore, it would be necessary to wait here 
some days, which he was unwilling to do, as he 
could not depend upon the weather, and wished 
to make further discoveries. He hoped in our 
Lord that he should be able through the me- 
dium of the indians on board, to have some con- 
versation with them upon his return ; and may 
it please the Almighty, says he that I may find 
some good traffic in gold before that time. 

Friday, Dec. 7th. At daybreak, they set sail 
and left the port of San Nicolas with a south- 
westerly wiud, and stood on their course two 
leagues to the NE. towards a cape which forms 
the carenero, when a bay was seen to the SE. 
and Cabo de la Estrella to the SW. twenty-four 
miles distant. From thence they proceeded to 
the east, along the coast, about forty-eight miles 
to Cabo Cinquin, twenty miles of which course 
they had gone E. by N. They found the land 
high and the water deep, close to the shore 
twenty and thirty fathoms, and a lombarda shot 
distant, no bottom ; all which was proved by 



124 FIRST VOYAGE 

actual experiment of the Admiral through the day. 
He remarks that if the space between the bay 
abovementioned and the harbour of San Nicolas 
were cut through, it would form an island of three 
or four miles in circuit. The land, as before, very 
high and a trees not large but like evergreen 
oaks and strawberry trees, the country closely 
resembling Castile. Two leagues before arriv- 
ing at Cabo Cinquin, they discovered an opening 
like a gap in the mountain* within which was 
seen a very large valley, covered apparently with 
barley, a sign that this valley abounded with 
settlements ; at the back of it were lofty and 
extensive mountains. Arrived at Cabo de Cinquin 
they found Cabo de Tortuga to bear NE., thirty- 
two miles distant. About a lombarda-shot from 
Cabo de Cinquin, there is a rock rising above the 
water, very easily noticed. At this place Cabo 
del Elefante bore E. by S., seventy miles distant, 
the land all very lofty. Six leagues further on- 
ward was a bay,t within which they discovered 
extensive valleys and fields, with very high 
mountains, the whole country appearing like 
Castile. At eight miles distance they found a 
river, which was narrow although deep, and 
might easily admit a carrack, the mouth without 
banks or shallows. Sixteen miles further along they 

* Bahia Mosquito. t Puerto Escudo, 



OF COLUMBUS. 125 

came to a harbour,* both broad, and of such a 
depth that no bottom was obtained at the en- 
trance, and the water was fifteen fathom sdeep 
a few feet from the shore ; it extended about a 
mile into the land. As the sky was very cloudy 
and threatened rain, an unfavourable state upon 
a coast, especially a strange one, the Admiral 
determined to put in here, although it was no 
later in the day than one o'clock, and a strong wind 
blew astern. This harbour he named Puerto 
de la Conception, and entering, landed near a 
small stream which flowed through fields and 
plains of wonderful beauty. They carried nets 
with them for fishing, and while rowing to the 
land, a skate similar to those of Spain, leaped 
into the boat ; this was the first instance of their 
meeting with a fish which resembled those of 
their own country. Many of these were taken 
by the sailors, as well as soles, and other fish 
like the Spanish. Going some distance round 
the country they observed the soil all under cul- 
tivation, and heard the songs of the nightingale 
and many other Spanish birds. They met five 
indians who immediately fled. A myrtle-tree 
was seen, and other trees and plants like those of 
Castile, which, in fact, the whole country resem- 
bles. 

x Bahia Mosquito. 



126 FIRST VOYAGE 

Saturday, Dec 8th. It rained very hard, with 
a strong north wind. The harbour was found 
secure from all winds exGept the north, which 
causes a great surf, driving the vessels from their 
moorings. At midnight the wind shifted to the 
NE., and afterward to the E., from which quar- 
ters the harbour is well sheltered by the island 
of Tortuga, which lies off against it, thirty-six 
miles distant.* 

Sunday, Dec. 9th. This day it continued to 
rain and the weather seemed wintry like Octo- 
ber in Castile. No settlement except a single 
house was seen at the Port of San Nicolas; this 
was a handsome one, and better constructed than 
those they had observed in other parts. This 
is a very large island, says the Admiral, and will 
undoubtedly measure two hundred leagues in 
circuit; the land is all cultivated to high degree, 
and the towns are probably at a distance back 
in the country, the inhabitants fleeing at the ap- 
proach of the strangers, carrying their property 
with them, and making signals by smoke about 
the country, as in a state of war. The harbour 
here is about a thousand paces or quarter of a 
league wide at the mouth, without either bank or 
shoal, but exceedingly deep to the edge of the 
shore : it extends within about three thousand 

* So in the text, but the true distance is only eleven 
miles. 



OF COLUMBUS. 127 

paces, with a fine clear bottom ; any ship may 
enter it and anchor without the least hazard. 
Here are two small streams, and opposite the 
mouth of the harbour, several plains the most 
beautiful in the world, and resembling those of 
Castile, except that they surpass them. On this 
account the Admiral name.d the island, Espanola. 

Monday, Dec. 10th. The wind blew strong 
from the NE., and they dragged their anchors with 
half the length of the cable, at which the Admi- 
ral wondered, and ordered the cables to be veer- 
ed out. Perceiving that the weather was unfa- 
vorable for his setting sail, he dispatched on 
shore six men, well armed and equipped, for the 
purpose of penetrating into the country and ob- 
taining some communication with the natives. 
They went and returned without seeing any of 
the inhabitants, or any dwellings save a few huts. 
They met with some narrow paths, and places 
where fires had been made. The country ap- 
peared the finest in the world, and they found 
mastick trees in abundance, but this was not the 
season for collecting it, as the gum does not 
concrete. 

Tuesday, Dec. 11th. The wind blowing E. 
and NE., they did not set sail. Directly oppo- 
site the harbour, as stated above, lies the island 
of Tortuga ; this appears of a very large size, 
and the coast runs in the same direction as the 



128 FIRST VOYAGE 

island of Espanola, the distance between them 
being at the most, ten leagues,* that is to say, 
from Cabo de Cinquin to the extremity of Tor- 
tuga, after which the coast tends to the South. 
The Admiral was desirous of proceeding along 
the channel between these two islands, in order 
to take a survey of Espanola, which affords the 
finest view in the world. The indians also in- 
formed him that this was the course he must 
take to reach the island of Babeque, which they 
described as very large, with rivers, valleys, and 
lofty mountains. The island of Bohio, they 
stated, was larger than that of Juana, which the 
inhabitants called Cuba, and was not surrounded 
by water, but as nearly as could be understood 
from them, was a continent, and situated behind 
Espanola, which they called Caritaba. The in- 
habitants of all these islands live in great fear of 
the people of Ca?iiba, and the Admiral here re- 
peats as he has done in many places, that Can- 
iba means no other than the people of the Great 
Can, who live somewhere in this neighborhood, 
and come in their vessels and make prisoners of 
the indians, who not returning, their countrymen 
imagine their enemies have devoured them. 
Each day, as the Admiral remarks, they improv- 
ed in their communications with the indians on 

* Error, as noted above. 



OF COLUMBUS. 129 

board, and conversed with them without such 
misunderstandings as formerly. They sent on 
shore and found a great many mastick trees, but 
the gum would not harden ; the Admiral thought 
that this might be effected by water, and ob- 
serves that in the island of Scio it is gathered in 
March, but these countries being warmer, it 
might probably be done in January. Many fish 
like those of Castile were taken, such as dace, 
salmon, poor-jacks, dories, pampanos, skates, car- 
vinas and shrimps: pilchards were also seen. 
Vast quantities of aloe were met with on shore. 
Wednesday, Dec. 12th. They were still una- 
ble to set sail, as the wind remained contrary. A 
large cross was set up at the entrance of the 
harbour, upon a beautiful spot upon the western 
side, 'as an indication' in the words of the Admi- 
ral, ' that your Highnesses possess the country, 
and principally for a token of Jesus Christ our 
Lord, and the honor of Christianity.' This being 
done, three sailors went into the woods to view 
the nighborhood and presently heard a sound of 
the indians, a crowd of whom they shortly after 
discovered completely naked ; they pursued and 
called out after them, but -they all took to flight. 
Having been directed by the Admiral to take some 
of the natives if possible, as he wished to show 
them some good offices, and dissipate their fear, 

thinking from the fine appearance of the country 
16 



130 FIRST VOYAGE 

that something valuable might be obtained here, 
the Spaniards kept on in the pursuit, and succeed- 
ed in capturing a female, handsome, and to ap- 
pearance quite young; her they brought to the 
ships where the Admiral conversed with her by 
the interpretation of his own indians, as their lan- 
guage was the same. He likewise caused her to 
be clothed, and presenting her with glass beads, 
hawk's bells and rings of brass, dismissed her 
home with every civility. Some of the crew 
were sent with her, as also three of the indians, 
for the purpose of communicating with the in- 
habitants. The sailors who carried her ashore 
told the Admiral that she showed much reluc- 
tance to leave the ship, and seemed inclined to 
remain with the females on board, whom they 
had taken at Puerto de Mares and Juana. The 
indians with whom she was first in company, 
came in a canoe, and when they came to the en- 
trance of the harbour and perceived the ships, 
abandoned their canoe, and fled towards the 
houses, whither she now directed the Spaniards. 
This woman wore a bit of gold at her nose, which 
was an indication that it was to be found in the 
island. 

Thursday, Dec. 13th. The three men whom 
the Admiral had dispatched into the country with 
the woman, returned, not having gone to the in- 
dian town, by reason either of the distance, or 



OP COLUMBUS. 131 

their fear. They affirmed that the next day 
there would come many of the inhabitants to the 
ships, as they would be encouraged by the ac- 
counts which the woman must give them. The 
Admiral, as he was desirous of ascertaining 
whether there was any thing valuable here, 
which he was inclined to believe, on account of 
the beauty and fertility of the country, and wish- 
ing to do every thing for the service of the King 
and Queen, resolved to send again to the town, 
confiding in the relation which the female must 
have given them of the friendly disposition of the 
Spaniards; for which purpose he selected nine 
persons from the crew, and dispatched them well 
armed and fitted for the enterprise, with one of 
his indians. They set out, and proceeded to the 
town,* which they found in an extensive valley, 
four leagues and half to the SE. It was desert- 
ed, as the inhabitants, perceiving the approach of 
the Spaniards, had all fled, leaving every thing 
behind them. The town consisted of a thousand 
houses, and more than three thousand inhabitants. 
The indian who accompanied the Spaniards ran 
after the fugitives, calling out to them not to fear, 
for the strangers were not from Cariba, but from 
heaven, and gave many fine things to those whom 

* Known afterwards by the name of Gros Morne, on the 
bank of the Rio de los tres Rws, which runs into the sea 
half a mile west of Port au Paix. 



132 FIRST VOYAGE 

they met. This had such an effect upon them, 
that they took courage, and came in a body of 
above a thousand to the Spaniards, putting their 
hands upon their heads, which is a manifestation 
of great reverence and friendship ; they stood 
trembling before them until the Spaniards by ma- 
ny assurances dissipated their apprehensions. 
The men further related that having overcome 
their dread, they went to their houses, and each 
one came bringing food for their guests ; this con- 
sisted of fish, and bread made of niames* which 
are roots resembling large radishes, cultivated 
throughout the country by the natives, and form- 
ing their principal subsistence ; these they pre- 
pare by baking and roasting; and the bread thus 
made so nearly resembles chesnuts in taste, that 
it might easily be mistaken for a preparation of 
that fruit. The indian who accompanied the 
Spaniards understanding that the Admiral wish- 
ed to obtain a parrot, told this, as they were led 
to suppose, to the inhabitants, who brought great 
numbers of them immediately to their guests, and 
gave them as many as they desired, without de- 
manding any thing in return. They entreated 
them not to return that night, and promised them 
many things which they had in the mountains. 



* Niames, names or ajes, a sort of sweet potatoes having 
the taste of chesnuts. 



OF COLUMBUS. 133 

While they were together with the Spaniards 
they espied a great multitude of people with the 
husband of the woman whom they had taken 
and entertained, this female they were carrying 
upon their shoulders, and came to return thanks 
to the Spaniards for the civilities which she had 
received, from the Admiral, and the presents he 
had given her. These people according to the 
relation of the men, were the handsomest, and 
best disposed, of any they had yet seen. The 
Admiral says he knows not how they could be 
better disposed than those of the other islands, 
assuring us that he had found them of the very 
best disposition. As to beauty, the men stated 
that they exceeded the others beyond compari- 
son, both males and females, being of a much 
lighter colour, and that two young females were 
seen as white as could be found in Spain. More- 
over they affirmed that the most beautiful and 
excellent territories in Castile, could not equal 
those of this country; to which indeed, the Ad- 
miral bore testimony, both in those he had be- 
fore visited, and in those of the present place, 
although he was informed that the land which 
he saw about the harbour was nothing in com- 
parison with the valley where the town stood; 
to which the plain of Cordova was no more equal 
than the night was to the day. The country, 
according to their relation was cultivated every 



134 FIRST VOYAGE 

where, and a large and wide river* capable of 
watering the whole territory, passed through the 
valley. The trees were flourishing and full of 
fruit, the plants very tall and luxuriant ; the paths 
wide and commodious. The temperature like 
April in Castile; the nightingale and other birds 
were singing as at that season in Spain, and pro- 
ducing, as they said, the most delightful melody 
in the world. Crickets and frogs in abundance 
were heard; the fish were like the Spanish. 
Many mastick and aloe trees were seen, as also 
cotton shrubs. No gold was found, which was 
not surprising, they had been here so short a 
lime. The Admiral here ascertained the length 
of the day and night, and found that from sun- 
rise to sunset there passed twenty glasses of half 
an hour each, although he says there may be some 
defect in the calculation from the glass not being 
turned quickly enough, or the contrary. He 
states further that he took an observation with 
the quadrant and found the latitude to be seven- 
teen degrees/!" 

Friday, Dec. 14th. They left the port of Con- 
ccpcion with a land breeze, which, however, soon 
died away; the same they had experienced 
every day they remained there. Afterwards 

*Rio de los Tres Rios or Trois Rivieres. 

|An error, either in writing or transcribing the journal ; 
the true latitude is twenty degrees. 



OP COLUMBUS. 135 

the wind sprung up from the east, and they 
stood to the NNE. which course brought them 
to the island of Tortuga. They descried a point 
of this island, which they named Punt a Pierna ; 
it was to the ENE. of the extremity of the isl- 
and, about a dozen miles distant. They also dis- 
covered another point to the NE., about sixteen 
miles off, this they called Punta Lanzada, it was 
forty-four miles, or eleven leagues from the ex- 
tremity of the island, towards the ENE. Along 
the coast there were several extensive beaches. 
The whole island is high, but not mountainous, 
and the land offers a beautiful prospect; it is 
moreover populous like Espanola, and the coun- 
try under such an extensive cultivation that it 
appears like the plain of Cordova. Finding the 
Avind unfavorable for proceeding to the island of 
Baneque* the Admiral concluded to return to 
Puerto de la Conception. There was a river 
two leagues east of the harbour, which he was 
unable to reach. 

Saturday, Dec. 15th. Left the harbour again, 
to proceed on their course ; but on putting to sea, 
found a strong easterly wind ahead, upon which 
they stood for Tortuga, and arriving at the isl- 
and, stood about and steered towards the river, 
which they saw the day before and could not 

'This he has hitherto called liabeqnr . 



136 FIKST VOYAGE 

reach, but were again unable to arrive there. 
They came to anchor half a league to leeward, 
at a beach with a good anchorage. The Admi- 
ral went with the boats to view the river, and 
entering an inlet near, found it was not the mouth. 
Returning, he discovered it at last with only a 
fathom's depth of water, and a strong current. 
Here he entered with the intention of visiting 
the settlements which the men he had sent into 
the country, had seen in this quarter. The end 
of a rope was carried on shore, and the boats 
towed up against the stream the distance of two 
lombarda-shots, not being able to proceed any 
further from the velocity of the current. Some 
houses were seen, and the valley where the 
town was situated; a river, which was the one 
they had entered, ran through the valley, and 
the Admiral declares that he never witnessed a 
more beautiful prospect. At the mouth of the 
river they met some of the inhabitants, who im- 
mediately fled. The Admiral states that these 
people must have been very subject to incursions 
from their enemies, as they displayed such a de- 
gree of fear. Wherever the Spaniards came, 
the inhabitants were observed to make signals 
by smoke, all over the country, more especially 
in Espanola and Tortuga. He named this val- 
ley, Valledel Paraiso, (Vale of Paradise) and the 
river, Guadalquivir, it being as wide as the river 



OF COLUMBUS. 137 

of that name at Cordova ; the banks were rocky, 
but pleasant and easy to travel. 

Sunday, Dec. 16th. At midnight, set sail with 
a light land breeze, and put to sea. At three 
o'clock, it shifted to the East, when they stood 
close upon the wind, and at a distance from the 
land, half way between Espanola and Tortuga, 
met with a canoe containing an indian, at which 
the admiral was surprised, wondering how he 
could keep the sea under so strong a wind. They 
took him with his canoe on board, and feasted 
him, presenting him with glass beads, hawk's 
bells and brass rings. The ships then steered to 
land towards a village* near the shore about six- 
teen miles distant, where they anchored, finding 
a good place near the village. This appeared to 
be a new settlement ; the houses being all of re- 
cent construction. The indian went on shore 
with his canoe, giving a favorable account of the 
Spaniards to his countrymen; they were already 
prepossessed in their favor, from the information 
they had received of the inhabitants of the town 
which had been before visited by them. Present- 
ly there came to the shore more than five hun- 
dred people, and shortly after, their king. They 
assembled upon the beach, close to which the 
ships were anchored. Ere long they came in 

* Port Paix, 

17 



138 r FIRST VOYAGK 

crowds on board, but brought nothing with them, 
except that a few wore bits of very fine gold at 
their ears and noses; these they very readily 
gave to the Spaniards. The Admiral ordered 
every civility to be shown them, 'because' as lie 
observes ' these are the best and most gentle peo- 
ple in the world, and especially, as I hope strong- 
ly in our Lord, that your Highnesses will under- 
take to convert them to Christianity, and that 
they may become your subjects, in which light, 
indeed J already regard them.' They saw the 
knig on the beach, and the natives around him, 
oifering their respects. The admiral sent him a 
present, which he received in great state. He 
appeared to be a youth of about twenty-one 
years, and was attended by an aged tutor and 
other counsellors who gave him their advice, and 
answered the questions put to them. The king 
himself spoke -but little. One of the indians be- 
longing to the ships conversed with him, and in- 
formed him that the Spaniards had come from 
heaven, and were going to the island of Bnnequc, 
in search of jjold. He answered that this was 
well, and in that island there was much of the 
same metal. To the alguacil of the Admiral 
who carried the present, he described the course 
to be taken, and informed him that in two days 
lie might arrive there ; he further added that if 
the Spaniards were in want of any thing which 



OF COLUMBUS. 139 

his country furnished, he would give it them with 
much good will. The people here were all na- 
ked, king as well as subjects, the females with- 
out displaying any symptoms of bashl'ulness. Both 
sexes were handsomer than any they had hither- 
to seen, their colour light, and if clothed and 
guarded from the sun and air would be nearly as 
fair as the inhabitants of Spain; the temperature 
of the air being cool and pleasant to a high de- 
gree. The land is very lofty, covered with 
plains and vallejs, and the highest mountains are 
arable. No part of Castile could produce a ter- 
ritory comparable to this in beauty and fertility. 
The whole island and that of Tortuga, are cov- 
ered with cultivated helds like the plains of Cor- 
dova. In these they raise ajes, which are slips 
set iu the ground, at the foot of which grow roots 
like carrots; they grate these to powder, knead 
up and make into bread of a very pleasant taste 
like chesnuts: the stalk is set out anew, and pro- 
duces another root, and this is repeated four or 
five times. The largest and most excellent that 
had been met with any where (the Admiral says 
they are also found in Guinea) were those of this 
island, being of the size of a man's leg. The in- 
habitants here according to the statement of the 
Admiral, were of a stout size and courageous 
temper, very different from the timid islanders of 
the other parts; agreeable in their intercourse 



140 FIRST VOYAGE 

and without any religion. The trees grew with 
such luxuriance that their leaves were rather 
black than green. It was wonderfully enchanting 
to view the valleys, the streams of fine water ? 
the fields of the bread root, the pastures fit for 
flocks of all descriptions, (although they possess- 
ed none,) the grounds adapted for gardens, and 
for every thing a man could desire. In the evening 
the king came on board ; the Admiral showed him 
every honor and informed him that he was a sub- 
ject of the King and Queen of Castile, who were 
the greatest princes in the world; neither the in- 
dians of the ship, who acted as interpreters, nor 
the king himself, believed this, but continued in 
the notion that the strangers came from heaven, 
Where they imagined the kingdom of Castile was 
situated, and not upon this earth. Food of the 
Spaniards was given to the king, of which he ate 
a mouthful and gave the rest to his tutor and 
counsellors, and the others about him. 'Your 
Highnesses may rest assured,' says the Admiral, 
' that these countries are so extensive, so excel- 
lent and fertile, especially the island of Espanola, 
that no person is competent to describe them, 
and no one would believe what was said of them, 
without ocular proof. And your Highnesses may 
entertain no doubt that they are as much your 
own as the territory of Castile, for nothing is 
wanting to this purpose, but a settlement here. 



OP COLUMBUS, 141 

and orders what to perform. With the men I 
have with me, which are not in great number, I 
can traverse these islands without opposition, for 
I have seen three of my crew go on shore, and a 
whole multitude of the indians take to flight with- 
out offering to resist them. They are all naked, 
and neither possess weapons nor know any thing 
about them. So timid are they, that a thousand 
of them would not oppose three of us. Thus 
they are very well fitted to be governed and set 
to work to till the land, and do whatever is ne- 
cessary 3 they may be also taught to build houses 
and wear clothes, and adopt our customs.' 

Monday, Dec. 17th. At night it blew hard 
from the ENE., but the sea was not much agi- 
tated in consequence, by reason of the island of 
Tortuga which lay off against them and afforded 
a shelter. They remained at anchor all day, 
and the sailors were sent with nets to fish. The 
indians took great pleasure in their intercourse 
with the Spaniards, and brought them certain 
arrows which belonged to the people of Caniba, 
or the Canibales : these were stalks of cane, 
pointed at the ends with large sticks, which 
were sharp and hardened in the fire. They 
were exhibited by two indians who had lost 
portions of flesh from their bodies ; these they 
informed the Admiral, the canibales had eaten, 
which he did not believe. Some of the Span- 



142 FIRST VOYAGE 

iards were sent on shore to the town, and for 
strings of beads bought some pieces of gold 
beaten out into thin plates. They saw a native 
whom the Admiral took for the governor of the 
district, and whom the indians call cacique ; he 
had a plate of gold as large as the hand, which 
he appeared desirous of bartering ; this he car- 
ried to his house and procured to be cut into 
pieces, which he traded away one by one ; the 
whole disposed of, he informed them by signs 
that he had sent for more, which would be 
brought the next day. These things, says the 
Admiral, with the manners of the people, their 
practice of communicating their advice, and their 
gentleness of behavior, show them to be more 
ingenious and of a better understanding than the 
others we have seen. In the evening came a 
canoe with forty men from Tortuga, on whose 
arrival at land, all the indians on shore sat down 
in signal of friendship, and most of those in the 
canoe landed. The Cacique stood up and with 
a speech apparently consisting of threats, sent 
them back to their canoe and threw water at 
them; also taking up stones from the beach he 
threw them into the sea; and after they had all 
with ready obedience gone into the canoe, he 
put a stone into the hand of the alguacil whom 
the Admiral had sent to land with the notary and 
others, that he might throw it at the canoe, 



OF COLUMBUS. 143 

which he declined doing. The canoe immedi- 
ately returned home. The cacique made every 
demonstration of favour to the Admiral, and 
told him that at Tortuga there was more gold 
than in Espanola, it being nearer to Bamque. 
The Admiral gives it as his opinion that neither 
in Espanola nor Tortuga are there mines of 
gold, but that it is brought from Baneque, and that 
these people get but little, because they have 
nothing to give in exchange for it, their country 
being so extensive that the inhabitants are not 
obliged to practice much labour for their subsis- 
tence, nor to procure clothing, as they go naked. 
He believed himself now near the spot where the 
gold was found, and that our Lord was about to 
direct him thither. He learnt that from hence 
to Baneque* was four days' voyage, amounting 
perhaps, to thirty or forty leagues, which dis- 
tance they might sail with a good wind in a single 
day. 

Tuesday, Dec. 18th. They remained at the 
anchorage through the day, not having a wind, 
and because the Cacique had told them he had 
gold to bring. The Admiral says he did not 
much regard the amount of this metal which he 
was likely to obtain here, but wished to know 



* This place was never found. Perhaps the island of 
Jamaica was meant. 



144 FIRST VOYAGE 

whence it came, as there were no mines in the 
island. In the morning lie ordered the ships to 
be dressed out with their flags and arms for a 
festival, in honor of the Annunciation of the Bless- 
ed Virgin, and fired many salutes. The king of 
the island left his home, which was about five 
leagues, off, and came to the town near the ships 
at three o'clock ; there were some of the Span- 
iards on shore whom the Admiral had sent to 
ascertain whether the indians had brought their 
gold. These informed, that above two hundred 
men came with the king, four of them carrying 
him upon a sort of bier. The Admiral being at 
his meal in the cabin, the king with all his at- 
tendants came to the ship, and observes, ' Your 
Highnesses would have been pleased to witness 
the honor and reverence they showed him, naked 
as they are. On coming on board and finding 
me at table in the cabin he came in the most re- 
spectful manner and sat down by me, and would 
not suffer me to rise, or to leave off* eating. I 
thought he would be pleased with some of our 
viands, and accordingly ordered a portion to be 
placed before him, which he ate. Upon enter- 
ing the cabin he made a sign with the hand for 
his people to remain without, which they did 
with the greatest readiness and respect in the 
world, and all sat down upon deck, except two 
men of mature age, whom I took for his coun- 



OP COLUMBUS. 145 

sellors ; these came and sat down at his feet, and 
the king would take a small mouthful of the vic- 
tuals and give the rest to his attendants who ate 
it; the same he did with the drink which was 
offered him, putting it to his mouth, and then 
passing it to the others ; all this was done with 
great state, and very few words, which as near 
as I could understand what he said, were uttered 
in a very sensible manner, his two attendants 
watching his countenance, conversing with him, 
and answering for him with the greatest degree 
of veneration. The meal finished, an attendant 
brought me a girdle shaped like those of Castile, 
but of different workmanship, this he presented 
to me and I accepted, as well as two pieces of 
gold, beaten very thin, of which metal I am in- 
clined to think they possess very little, although 
they are in the neighborhood of the place where 
it is produced in abundance. I saw that he was 
pleased with the hanging over my bed, and made 
him a present of it, with some fine amber beads 
which I wore upon my neck, and some red shoes 
and a flask of orange-flower water; with these 
gifts he was wonderfully delighted, and both he 
and his counsellors appeared to feel much regret 
that we could not understand one anothers' 
language. By all I could gather from him, he 
informed me that if I desired anything of his, the 
whole island was at my service. I then produced 
18 



146 FIRST VOYAGE 

a gold excelentc,* upon which the images of your 
Highnesses were stamped, and showed it to him, 
letting him know, as I had done before, that your 
Highnesses reigned over the first kingdom in the 
world, and that there were no where so great 
princes. I also exhibited to him the royal stand- 
ards and the banners of the cross, which he much 
admired, and spoke with his counsellors respect- 
ing the great power of your Highnesses who had 
sent me such a distance from heaven, to these 
parts. Many other things passed, of which I 
understood nothing, save that they manifested 
great wonder.' 

As it grew late he desired to return to land, 
whither the Admiral dispatched him in the boat 
with great honor, firing a salute. Arrived on shore 
he ascended his bier and went up into the island 
accompanied by the whole multitude ; his son was 
carried behind him upon the shoulders of one of 
the most honorable men. Wherever the indians 
met with any of the sailors, they gave them food 
and showed them great respect. One of them 
encountered the troop accompanying the king 
home, and stated that he saw the presents the 
Admiral had given, carried before the king, each 
separate article by one of the principal men, as 
was judged from the appearance. The king's 

* Spanish coin. 



OF COLUMBUS. 147 

son followed his father with an equal train of at- 
tendants, as also a brother of the king in the same 
manner, except that he went on foot, being led 
by the arms by two honorable men. This per- 
son came to the ship after the king had left her, 
and the Admiral made him a few presents, learn- 
ing now, that the king was called in the language 
of the indians Cacique. This day little gold was 
obtained, but the Admiral was given to under- 
stand by an old man, that there were many is- 
lands in the neighbourhood, at the distance of a 
hundred leagues and more, as near as he could 
gather, where much gold was obtained, and that 
in some of them it was found in such plenty that 
the inhabitants collected and boulted it with 
sieves, after which they melted and beat it into 
bars and many other shapes which were describ- 
ed by signs. One of the islands was said to be 
totally composed of gold. The old man pointed 
out the direction in which these countries lay, 
and the Admiral determined to proceed thither. 
He remarks that if this person had not been one 
of the principal men of the king, he should have 
taken and carried him along with him, or had he 
understood his language would have intreated 
him to that effect, and thinks as he was so well 
pleased with the Spaniards, that he would very 
willingly have accompanied them; nevertheless, 
as he considered these people to belong to the 



148 FIRST VOYAGE 

sovereigns of Castile he was unwilling to offend 
them. A lofty cross was set up in the square 
or centre of the village, in which work the indians 
assisted much, and repeated, as the Admiral says, 
prayers and adorations, from which circumstance 
he hopes in our Lord that these islands will all 
become christian. 

Wednesday, Dec. 19th. They set sail at night 
to leave the gulf formed by the island of Tortu- 
ga and Espanola. Upon the approach of day the 
wind shifted to the E., for which reason they 
were unable through the day to get out from be- 
tween the islands ; night coming on they found it 
impossible to reach a harbour* they saw near. In 
the neighbourhood of that place they espied four 
capes, and a bay and river, also another large 
bayt where there was a village, in the rear of 
which they saw a valley among several very high 
mountains; these mountains were covered with 
trees, which the Admiral judged to be pines. 
At the back of the capes which he called Los 
dos Hermanos, there was a mountain very large 
and high,which runs from NE. to S W. ESE. from 
another cape named Cabo de Torres^, there was 
a little isle which he called Saint Thomas, the 
next day being the anniversary of that saint. He 

* Puerto de la Granja. | Port Margot. 

J Punta de Limbe. 



OP COLUMBU9. 149 

judged that this whole country abounded in capes 
and excellent harbours, from what he could ob- 
serve at sea. West of the isle abovementioned, 
was a cape running far into the sea, lofty in some 
parts and in others low, from this circumstance 
he named it Cabo alto y baxo* Seventy miles 
E. by S. from Camino de Torres was a mountain 
loftier than any other, which extended into the 
sea ; it appeared like an island, on account of a 
gap towards the land; he called it Monte Cari- 
bata, as the district around was named Caribata ; 
it was a beautiful height without clouds or snow, 
but covered with flourishing trees. The weather 
here, with respect to the air and temperature 
was like March in Castile, and the trees and 
herbs as in May in that country. The nights 
were fourteen hours long. 

Thursday, Dec. 20th. At sunset this day they 
entered a harbourt between the island of St. 
Thomas and Cabo de Caribata ; here they an- 
chored. The harbour was found a very good 
one, and capacious enough to hold all the ships 
in Christendom. The entrance appeared imprac- 
ticable from without, on account of several 
ledges of rocks which run from the mountain 
nearly to the island ; these are scattered about 
in an irregular manner, some near the land and 

* Point and Isle Margot, t Bahia de Acul. 



150 FIRST VOYAGE 

others off at sea, which renders it necessary to 
take great care in sailing in, the channels being 
very narrow, although deep, having seven fath- 
oms water, and within the rocks twelve fathoms. 
A ship might lie here moored with any sort of 
rope, and be safe from all winds. Near the 
mouth of the harbour was a plantation of canes 
at the west of a little sandy islet, which w s 
overgrovui with trees, and at the foot of which 
were seven fathoms water. The harbour is safe 
from all the storms which can blow. From this 
place appeared a wide and cultivated valley 
which descended to the sea from the SE., and 
was totally shut in by exceedingly tall mountains 
which seemed to rise to heaven; these presented 
the most delightful view, being covered wi:h 
luxuriant trees. No doubt there are mountains 
here loftier than the island of Teneritfe which 
is held to be the highest in the world, Mere is 
another isle,* a league from that of St. Thomas, 
and within it another, all having fine harbours, 
but where it is necessary to look out for the 
shoals. Villages were seen, and smokes made by 
the inhabitants. 

Friday, Dec. 21. The Admiral went with the 
boats to examine the harbour, and after having 
surveyed it declares that it is equalled by none 

* Isla de Ratas. 



OP COLUMBUS. 151 

which he has seen elsewhere. He excuses him- 
self, saying that he has been so abundant in his 
praises of the others, that he has nothing left to 
say for this, and adds that he fears to be taken 
for an extravagant exaggerator of the truth, but 
is encouraged by the reflexion that he has in 
company, mariners of experience who will con- 
firm his account. He repeats that the commen- 
dations he has bestowed upon the other ports 
are true, and the superiority he has assigned this, 
he affirms to be true likewise, adding ' I have 
followed the seas for twenty-three years, without 
being on shore any space of time worth account- 
ing, and have seen all the East and West, and 
been to the North where England is situated, 
and even to Guinea, but in none of these coun- 
tries are to be found ports of such excellence as 
are to be met with here ; and as I go on making 
discoveries they show themselves better and bet- 
ter, as I find by carefully examining my journal : 
and I again affirm that this is superior to them 
all, and large enough to contain all the ships in 
the world, and so well sheltered that a ship might 
ride with safety, although moored with the rot- 
tenest rope in the world.' From the entrance 
to the bottom of the harbour is a distance of 
five leagues.* Fields were seen under cultiva- 

* Error, five miles. 



152 FIRST VOYAGE 

tion, indeed this was the case every where. 
Two men were dispatched from the boats, and 
ordered to ascend a height and look out after 
the villages of the inhabitants, as none were seen 
from the sea, although it was judged there were 
some in the neighborhood, by a canoe with In- 
dians having come last night about ten o'clock, 
to gaze at the ships, these men the Admiral pre- 
sented with some trifles which pleased them 
greatly. The two Spaniards returned, informing 
that they had discovered a large town* at a little 
distance from the sea ; the Admiral ordered the 
boats to row that way, and presently espied sev- 
eral indians coming down to the shore ; they 
seemed to be fearful of the Spaniards, and the 
Admiral directed the boats to be stopped and 
the indians on board to speak to those on land 
and tell them they were friends, upon which the 
natives came close to the water's edge and the 
boats proceeded to land ; the inhabitants now 
banished all their fears and came down in such 
numbers as to cover the beach, making a thou- 
sand civilities to the Spaniards, men, women, and 
children. They ran here and there bringing 
bread made of niames, which they name ajes, 
this was very white and good; they also brought 
water in calabashes and earthen vessels, shaped 

t Acul. 



OP COLUMBUS. 153 

like the pitchers of Castile. Whatever thing they 
were in possession of, and knew the Spaniards 
wanted, they offered with great pleasure and the 
utmost liberality. The Admiral remarks 'These 
could not be deemed gifts of mean value, al- 
though their intrinsic worth was small, because 
every thing was given with the greatest gene- 
rosity ; a piece of gold was offered with as willing 
readiness as a calabash of water, and it is easy 
to perceive when a thing is given with a good 
will. These people have neither staves, jave- 
lins nor any other weapons, and this I have re- 
marked of all the inhabitants of this isl- 
and, which appears to me to be very large. 
They are all as naked as they were born, both 
men and women, whereas in Juana, and the 
other islands the females wear a small covering 
of cotton at the waist, especially those above a 
dozen years, but neither old nor young practise it 
here. In other places we have found the inhab- 
itants anxious to conceal their women from us, 
but here they display no such jealousy. The 
females at this place possess fine shapes, and 
were the first to give thanks to heaven upon 
our arrival, and bring us offerings, especially 
bread of ajes and five or six sorts of fruits.' 
These last the Admiral caused to be preserved 
for the King and Queen. The same treatment 
they had received from the women in other 
19 



154 FIRST VOYAGE 

parts before the men took care to keep them out 
of sight. The Admiral gave strict orders that 
the utmost attention should be paid, not to give 
offence to the natives in any thing, and that no 
article should be taken from them without his 
permission ; in this manner they were paid for 
every thing they gave the Spaniards. The Ad- 
miral remarks that he believes no one ever met 
with a people of such a liberal and generous dispo- 
sition, which was exercised to such a degree that 
they were ready to rob themselves of every ar- 
ticle of property to oblige their guests, flocking 
to them with offerings wherever they arrived. 
He sent six of his men to examine the town 
which had been seen, to these the indians show- 
ed every honour they could invent, and presented 
such things as they had, not doubting in the least 
that the Admiral and all his crew had come from 
heaven, which also the indians on board still con- 
tinued to think, notwithstanding what the Span- 
iards had told them. The men being gone to 
the town, there came several canoes from a sov- 
ereign in the neighborhood, to request the Ad- 
miral on leaving this place to visit his town. 
The Admiral perceiving great crowds of people 
waiting for him upon a point of land, proceeded 
thither, when there came down to the shore 
immense multitudes, men, women and children 
crying out for him not to leave them, but remain 



OP COLUMBUS. 155 

there. The ambassadors of the prince above- 
mentioned, were all this time waiting with their 
canoes, lest he should go away without comply- 
ing with their invitation. The Admiral then set 
off, and arriving near the place where the prince 
was waiting to receive him, this sovereign order- 
ed all his people to seat themselves upon the 
ground, he then dispatched men with provisions 
to the boats which, seeing that the Spaniards 
accepted, the greater part of the indians ran off 
to the town which, was probably near, and came 
back, bringing more, along with parrots and other 
things, which they offered with surprising liberal- 
ity. Although they demanded nothing in return? 
the Admiral gave them glass beads, hawk's bells, 
and brass rings, as he thought it but just that pay- 
ment should be made them, and in particular as 
he says, because he looked upon them as chris- 
tians, and more the subjects of the King and 
Queen, than the people of Castile. Pie adds 
that nothing is wanting but to know their lanouaire 
and give them orders, as they will perform every 
tiling commanded them without making the least 
opposition. He then left the place to return to 
the ships, the indians all calling out, men, women 
and children, and entreating him to remain among 
them. Several canoes full of men followed the 
boats to the ships, these the Admiral treated 
with much civility and gave them food and other 



156 FIRST VOYAGE 

presents. Great numbers came from the shore 
swimming about the ship, which was above half 
a league from the land. While the Admiral was 
upon his visit there came another prince from 
the westerly part of the island, and not finding 
him, he returned. The Admiral sent some men 
to visit and obtain information from him ; these 
he received very graciously, and conducted to- 
ward his town where he intended to give them 
some large pieces of gold ; they went along with 
him till they came to a wide river, which the 
indians passed by swimming, but the Spaniards 
being unable to cross it, returned back. All 
this neighborhood abounds in mountains so lofty 
that they seem to reach to the skies ; The Peak of 
TenerifTe is nothing in comparison with them, 
either for height or beauty. These are all cov- 
ered with wood and vegetation in a delightful 
manner, and inclose among them many beautiful 
plains. At the South of this harbour is a plain 
so extensive that the eye cannot reach the end, 
it is probably fifteen or twenty leagues in extent, 
without the interruption of a single eminence \ 
it contains a river and is inhabited and cultivated 
throughout, being at present as green and flour- 
ishing, as the fields in Castile in May or June, 
although the nights are here fourteen hours 
long, and this country so far to the North. The 
harbour here is well sheltered from every 



OF COLUMBUS. 157 

wind that can blow, being deep and well shut in. 
Ships may also lie here in perfect safety from 
any incursion during the night from without ; for 
although the entrance has a width of more than 
two leagues, it is confined by a couple of rocky 
ledges nearly on a level with the water, leaving 
a very narrow passage which seems almost the 
work of art. In the mouth of the harbour there 
are seven fathoms depth of water, this continues 
to a level islet which has a beach and is covered 
with trees. The entrance is to the West, where 
a ship may sail in without fear, coming close to 
the rock. Towards the NW. are three islands 
and a large river, a league from the cape of this 
harbour. This being St. Thomas's day, the Ad- 
miral named the harbour The Port of the Sea oj 
St. Thomas, calling it a sea, from its size. 

Saturday, Dec. 22d. At daybreak they set sail 
to go in search of the islands where, as the indians 
told them, there was much gold, and in some of 
them more gold than earth; but found the weath- 
er unfavorable and returned to their anchorage, 
when the boat was dispatched with nets for fish- 
ing. The sovereign of the country* who resided 
in the neighborhood sent a large canoe full of 
men, with one of his principal attendants request- 

*This was Guacanagari, sovereign of Marien, where 
Columbus built a fort, and left a party of his men at his re- 
turn to Spain. 



158 rrRST voyage 

ing the Admiral to come with the ships to his ter- 
ritory, promising him any thing he had. He sent 
by this messenger a girdle to which was attached 
instead of a pouch, a mask having the nose, tongue, 
and ears of beaten gold. The indians in the ca- 
noe, meeting the boat, gave the girdle to a ship's 
boy, and proceeded on board the ship with their 
embassy. Some time passed before they could 
be understood, the indians on board not compre- 
hending them, as their language was somewhat 
different from that of the others; finally they 
made out to express themselves by signs, and made 
known their invitation. The Admiral determined 
to accept it, and came to a resolution to sail the 
next day, which Avas Sunday, although he was not 
accustomed to put to sea on that day ; this arose 
from devotion and not from any superstitious scru- 
ples. Besides, entertaining a hope that these 
people, by the willingness they manifested, would 
become christians, and subjects of Castile, and al- 
ready looking upon them in that light, he was de- 
sirous of doing every thing to oblige them. Be- 
fore quitting this place he sent six of his men to a 
very large town, three leagues to the West, the 
prince of that place having visited the Admiral 
the preceding day and told him that he had sev- 
eral pieces of gold. With these men he sent his 
secretary, whom he charged to take care that 
the Spaniards did nothing wrong to the indians. 



OF COLUMBUS. 159 

for these were so liberal, and the Spaniards so im- 
measurably greedy, that they were not satisfied 
with receiving the most valuable of what the in- 
habitants possessed, in exchange for a leather 
thong, a bit of glass or earthen ware, or other 
worthless trifle, and sometimes for nothing at all, 
which, however, the admiral had always prohibit- 
ed. Although the articles which the indians offer- 
ed were of little value, except the gold, yet the 
Admiral considering the readiness with which 
they parted with them, as giving a piece of gold 
for half a dozen strings of glass beads, ordered 
that nothing should be taken from them without 
paying for it. The Spaniards arriving at the 
town, the prince took the secretary by the hand, 
and led him, accompanied by a great multitude of 
people, to his house, where victuals were set be- 
fore the Spaniards, and large quantities of cotton 
cloth and balls of yarn brought them. Late in 
the evening the Spaniards returned, the prince 
presenting them with three fat geese and some 
bits of gold ; a great number of the indians accom- 
panied them back, and insisted upon carrying 
their goods for them across the rivers and miry 
places. The Admiral made the prince some 
presents, at which he and all his people showed 
the greatest pleasure, and thought themselves 
happy in gazing upon the Spaniards, whom they 
believed to have come from heaven. This dav 



160 FIRST VOYAGE 

more than a hundred and twenty canoes came to 
the ships, all filled with people, and every one 
bringing something, in particular bread, fish, and 
water in earthen pitchers, as also a kind of seed 
which serves very well for a spice ; of this they 
put a grain in a cup of water and drink it. The 
indians on board the ships affirmed that it was very 
wholesome. 

Sunday, Dec. 23d. The want of wind com- 
pelled them to remain here still, and the Admiral 
dispatched the boats with his secretary to the 
prince from whom he had received the invitation 
the day before. While they were gone he sent, 
two of his indians to visit the towns in the neigh- 
borhood, these returned bringing a prince of the 
country with them, and the information that 
gold was to be had in that island in as great 
plenty as could be desired, the people coming 
thither from other parts to obtain it. More 
persons arrived who confirmed this account, 
and showed the manner of collecting it; this the 
Admiral understood with difficulty, but still 
held it for certain that the metal must exist in 
abundance in these parts, where on finding the 
spot it might be got for little or nothing. He 
remarks that he is confirmed in this opinion by 
having in the three days he has been here, re- 
ceived many large pieces, and cannot believe it is 
brought hither from other places. He utters 



OP COLUMBUS. 161 

these words ' Our Lord, in whose hands are all 
things, be my help, and order every thing for his 
service.' More than a thousand of the inhabitants 
visited the ships, every one bringing something; 
their custom was on arriving within half a bow- 
shot, to stand up in their canoes holding out their 
offerings in their hands, and exclaiming ' Take ! 
Take !' Besides these there came above five hun- 
dred, swimming for want of canoes, the ships be- 
ing anchored near a league from the shore. Five 
princes with all their families came among the 
rest to visit the Spaniards, to all whom the Ad- 
miral made presents, esteeming every thing given 
them well bestowed. 'Our Lord in his mercy,' 
says he ' direct me where I may find the gold 
mine, as 1 have many here who profess to be 
acquainted with it.' At night the boats return- 
ed and informed that they had gone a great dis- 
tance, and at the mountain of Caribatan had met 
with canoes full of people, coming from the place 
where the Spaniards were going, to visit the Admi- 
ral ; these turned back and accompanied the Span- 
iards to the town,* which they found the largest 
and most regular with respect to the streets, of 
any that had been seen: it was situated nearly three 
leagues to the southeast of Punta Santa.'t The 
canoes rowing faster than the boats, slipped ahead 

* Guarico. t San Honorato. 

20 



162 FIRST VOYAGE 

and carried the intelligence of their arrival to the 
Cacique as they called him. Hitherto the Admi- 
ral had been unable to learn whether this was 
the name of a king or a governor. They have 
another name for their chief people, which is 
Nitayno ;* whether this signified governor, no- 
bleman, or judge, could not be ascertained. The 
Cacique came out to meet the Spaniards in the 
public square of the town, which was a fine neat 
place ; here more than two thousand men assem- 
bled, every one bringing victuals for the stran- 
gers. The king showed them great honor, and 
gave each man a portion of such cotton cloth as 
the women wear, adding some parrots and pieces 
of gold for the Admiral ; the people also gave 
the Spaniards cotton cloths and other things, re- 
ceiving whatever trifles were offered them in re- 
turn, which they valued as highly as if they es- 
teemed them relics. At evening when they 
wished to return, the king entreated them to 
stay till morning, and all the peoj la joined in the 
solicitation. Finding them determined to set out, 
a great number accompanied them, carrying for 
them upon their shoulders the articles which the 
Spaniards had acquired there; they thus attend- 

*A Nitayno was a grandee next in rank to the king. 

Las Casas. 



OP COLUMBUS. 163 

ed them to the boats, which were left at the 
mouth of the river. 

Monday, Dec. 21th. Before sunrise they 
weighed anchor, and put to sea with a land 
breeze. Among the indians who came on board 
yesterday, and informed them there was gold in 
the island, naming the places where it was found, 
there was one who seemed to display an uncom- 
mon degree of liking for the Spaniards; him the 
Admiral caressed, and prevailed upon to go along 
with him, and direct the way to the gold mines. 
This man was accompanied by another, his com- 
panion or relation, and both these, among other 
places they spoke of, where the gold was obtained, 
named Cipango which they called Civao, and said 
it was very far to the East, possessing vast quan- 
tities of gold, and that the Cacique of the country 
had his banners made of plates of that metal. 
The Admiral in this place says, i Your highnesses 
may be assured that there is not upon earth a 
better or gentler people, at which you may re- 
joice, for they will easily become christians and 
learn our customs. A finer country or people can- 
not exist, and the territory is so extensive and the 
people so numerous, that I know not how to give 
a description of them, as 1 have spoken so highly 
of the people and country of Juana which the 
inhabitants call Cuba. But there is a difference 
between these two countries as great as between 



164 FIRST VOYAGE 

day and night. I think no one who has seen these 
parts, can say less in their commendation than I 
have said. I repeat that it is a matter of won- 
der to see the things we have met with, and the 
multitudes of people in this island, which I call 
Espanola, and the indians Bohio ; they are sin- 
gularly pleasant in their intercourse and con- 
versation with us, and not like the others, who 
when they speak appear to be uttering menaces; 
their shapes are fine, both men and women, and 
their colour not black, although they paint them- 
selves, the most of them red, others of a dark 
hue, and others of still different colours, all which, 
I understand, is done to keep the sun from in- 
juring them. The houses and towns are very 
handsome, and the inhabitants live in each set- 
tlement under the rule of a sovereign or judge, 
to whom they pay implicit obedience. These 
magistrates are persons of excellent manners, and 
great reserve, and give their orders by a sign with 
the hand, which is understood by all with surpri- 
sing quickness. 

In order to enter this port, called The Sea of 
St. Thomas,* it is necessary to stand for a small 
level island at the entrance, which was named 
La jUmiga, and coming within a stone's throw, to 
pass to the westward of the island, keeping close 

* Bahia de Acu\. 



OP COLUMBUS. 165 

to the shore, as a large reef comes out from the 
west, which extends a lombarda-shot towards the 
island ; in the channel are at the shoalest parts, 
seven fathoms, with a gravelly bottom, and with- 
in is room sufficient for all the ships in the world, 
where they may lie without moorings. There 
are two or three shoals without, and other large 
shoals and a reef are to the east, extending to- 
wards the island La Amiga, and far into the sea, 
coming two leagues towards the cape ; but among 
these there appeared a channel two lombarda- 
shots from La Amiga, and at the foot of Mount 
Caribatan, a spacious and excellent harbour.* 

Tuesday, Dec. 25th. Christmas. Last night 
they kept along the coast with a light wind, from 
the sea of St. Thomas to the headland named 
Punta Santa, and at the end of the first watch, 
about eleven o'clock, being off this point about a 
league distant, the Admiral laid down to sleep, 
having taken no rest for two days and a night 
past. As the sea was calm, the man at the helm 
left his place to a boy, and went off to sleep like- 
wise, contrary to the express orders of the Ad- 
miral, who had throughout the voyage, forbid- 
en, in calm or storm, the helm to be intrusted 
to a boy. The Admiral was free from any 
dread of rocks or shoals, as the Sunday before, 

* Port Francois. 



,\ 



166 FITtST VOYAGE 

when he sent the boats to the king, they had 
passed three leagues and a half to the east of 
Pimta Santa, and the sailors had surveyed the 
whole coast for three leagues beyond that point, 
and ascertained where the ships might pass, a 
thing never done before in the whole voyage. 
But as it pleased our Lord, at midnight, it being 
a dead calm, and the sea perfectly motionless, as 
in a cup, the whole crew, seeing the Admiral had 
retired, went off to sleep, leaving the ship in the 
care of the boy abovementioned, when the cur- 
rent carried her imperceptibly toward the shoals 
in the neighborhood, upon which she struck with 
a noise that might be heard a league off. The 
boy at the helm hearing the roar of the sea, and 
feeling the current beating at the rudder, cried 
out, at which the Admiral awoke, and sprang 
upon deck before any of the sailors perceived 
that they had run aground; presently the mas- 
ter, whose watch it was, came up, and the Admi- 
ral ordered him and others who quickly made 
their appearance, to hoist out the boat and car- 
ry an anchor astern; the boat being hoisted out, 
the master and many others went into her, as the 
Admiral supposed to fulfil the order. Instead of 
doing this, they rowed off to the caravel, which 
was about half a league to windward. Those 
on board, however, with great propriety and jus- 
tice refused to receive them, and sent them back, 



OF COLUMBUS. 167 

dispatching also their own boat, which arrived 
first at the ship. Meantime the Admiral finding 
his men deserting him, and the ship down upon 
her side, with the water leaving her, saw no oth- 
er remedy but to cut away the mast, and throw 
overboard every thing they could spare, hoping 
that this would lighten and set her afloat, but in 
spite of all, the water continued to ebb, and the 
ship to lie down towards the sea, which fortunate- 
ly continued smooth, and presently she opened 
between the ribs. The Admiral proceeded to 
the caravel to dispose of his crew, and as a slight 
breeze blew from the land, and much of the night 
remained, they lay to till day, not knowing how far 
the shoals extended; at day break he proceeded 
inside of the shoal to the ship, having first sent the 
boat to land with Diego de Arana, of Cordova, al- 
guazil of the fleet, and Pedro Gutierrez, page of 
the royal wardrobe, to carry the news of his mis- 
fortune to the king, who had sent him the invita- 
tion the Saturday before, and whose residence 
was about a league and a half beyond the shoal 
where the ship lay. This person, as they stated, 
upon hearing the information, shed tears, and 
dispatched all the people of the town with large 
canoes to unload the ship; with their assistance 
the decks were cleared in a very short time, so 
great was the diligence of the king and his men. 
He, with his brothers and relations came to the 



168 FIRST VOYAGE 

shore, and look every care that all the goods 
should be safely brought to land, and carefully 
preserved. From time to time he sent his rela- 
tions to the Admiral weeping, and consoling him, 
and entreating him not to be afflicted at his loss, 
for he would give him all he had. The Admiral 
here observes to the King and Queen, that in no 
part of Castile would more strict care have been 
taken of his goods, not the smallest trifle was 
lost. The king ordered several houses to be 
cleared for the purpose of stowing the goods. 
Here a guard was set over them who watched 
throughout the night. * The people as well as 
the king shed tears in abundace,' says the Admi- 
ral. ' They are a very loving race, and without 
covetousness ; they are adapted to any use, and I 
declare to your Highnesses that there is not a 
better country nor a better people in the world 
than these. They love their neighbors as they 
do themselves, and their language is the smooth- 
est and sweetest in the world, being always ut- 
tered with smiles. They all, both men and wo- 
men go totally naked, but your Highnesses may 
be assured that they possess many commendable 
customs; their king is served with great rever- 
ence, and every thing is practised with such de- 
cency that it is highly pleasing to witness it. 
They have great memories and curiosity, and 



OF COLUMBUS. 169 

are very eager in their inquiries as to the nature 
and use of all they see.' 

Wednesday, Dec. 26th. At sunrise the king 
of the country visited the Admiral on board the 
Nina, and with tears in his eyes, intreated him 
not to indulge in any grief, for he would give him 
all he had ; that he had already assigned the 
Spaniards on shore two large houses, and if neces- 
sary, would, grant others, and as many canoes as 
could be used in bringing the goods and crew to 
land, which, in fact, he had done the day before, 
without the smallest trifle being purloined, ' so 
honest and free from covctousness are they,' 
says the Admiral, ' and their king pre-eminent 
in virtue.' While the Admiral was conversing 
with him, a canoe arrived from another place, 
with indians bringing pieces of gold, which they 
wanted to exchange for a hawk's-bell, these be- 
ing held in special value among them ; before the 
canoe reached the vessel, the indians called out, 
showing the gold, and crying chuq, chuq* for the 
hawk's-bells, and seemed ready to go mad after 
them; the other canoes setting off, they request- 
ed the Admiral to preserve a hawk's-bell for 
them, and they would bring him in return four 
pieces of gold as big as his hand. This intelli- 
gence gave him great joy, and there presently 

*Take ? take, 
21 



170 FIRST VOYAGE 

came a sailor from the land and informed the 
Admiral that the Spaniards were carrying on a 
great traffic with the indians, purchasing bits of 
gold worth more than two castellanos, for a strap 
of leather, and that this was nothing to what it 
would be within a month. The King was much 
rejoiced to see the Admiral in good spirits, and 
discovering that he was anxious to obtain gold, 
he informed him by signs that he knew where, 
in that neighborhood, a great deal of it might 
be had, and that the Admiral might be of good 
cheer, for he would give him as much as he 
wanted. He gave him a further account of it, 
and told him it existed in Cipango, which they 
called Civao, in such abundance that it was held 
in no esteem. It was understood in the same 
way, that it was brought hither from that place, 
although in the island of Espanola, and in the 
district of Caribata there were also great quan- 
tities. The king took a meal on board the cara- 
vel, and then went on shore accompanied by the 
Admiral, whom he treated with every honor, 
feasting him with several sorts of ajcs, shrimps, 
game and other viands, with bread which they 
call cazavi. Afterwards he conducted him into 
an arbour near his house, where they were at- 
tended by more than a thousand persons. The 
king had on a shirt and a pair of gloves, which 
he had received from the Admiral, these last he 



/ 



OF COLUMBUS. 171 

particularly admired. In his manner of taking 
food he showed a decency and neatness well 
worthy of his rank; after finishing his repast, at 
which he continued long, certain herbs were 
brought him, with which he rubbed his hands 
for a considerable time, which was done as the 
Admiral thought, to soften them ; water was then 
fetched him for washing. -The meal completed, 
he went down to the shore with the Admiral, 
who sent for a Turkish bow and some arrows, 
these he gave to one of the crew who was expert 
in their use, and the exhibition of them much as- 
tonished the king, who knew nothing of weapons, 
his people neither using nor possessing them, 
although some discourse had been held here, 
about the people of Caniba whom they call 
Caribes, these, they stated, were accustomed to 
come and attack them with bows and arrows ; 
it was ascertained that these last were not head- 
ed with iron, for neither iron nor steel are 
known in these parts, nor any other metal, ex- 
cept gold and copper; the Admiral saw little 
of the copper. The king was then given to 
understand by signs that the sovereigns of . Cas- 
tile would send people to fight against the Ca- 
ribes, and bring them ail prisoners with their 
hands tied. By order of the Admiral, a lorn- 
bar Aa and an espingarda were fired, and the ef- 
fect of their shot struck the king with new won- 
der, frightening the indians to such a degree that 



172 FIRST VOYAGE 

they all fell upon the ground. Afterwards a 
large mask was brought, with great pieces of 
gold, at the ears, eyes, and other places ; this the 
king gave the Admiral, along with other jewels 
of the same metal, which he placed upon his head 
and neck ; many other presents were made to 
the Spaniards. All these things had a great ef- 
fect upon the Admiral in assuaging his grief for 
the loss of the ship, and he began to be convinc- 
ed that our Lord had permitted the shipwreck 
in order that he might choose this place for a set- 
tlement. ' And to this end,' says he, so many fa- 
vorable things offered, that it cannot be called a 
disaster, but a great piece of good fortune, for if 
Ave had not run aground, we should have kept off 
without anchoring here, the place being in a 
large bay withinside of two or three shoals. 
Neither should I otherwise have been induced 
to leave any men in these parts during the voy- 
age, nor if I had, could I have spared them the 
proper provisions and materials for their for- 
tification. Many of my crew have solicited me 
for permission to remain, and I have to-day or- 
dered the construction of a fort, with a tower 
and ditch, all to be well built, not that 1 deem 
such a fortification necessary as a defence against 
the inhabitants, as I have already stated that 
with my present crew, I could subjugate the 
whole island, which I believe to be larger than 



OF COLUMBUS. 173 

the kingdom of Portugal, and twice as populous, 
but that I judge it proper, as the territory is at 
such a distance from our country, and that the 
natives may understand the genius of the people 
of your Highnesses, and what they are able to 
perform, so that they may be held in obedience 
by fear as well as love. For this purpose I 
have directed that there shall be provided a 
store of timber for the construction of the fort, 
with provision of bread and wine for more than 
a year, seed for planting, the long-boat of the 
ship, a calker, a carpenter, a gunner, a cooper, 
and many other persons, among the number of 
those who have earnestly desired to serve your 
Highnesses and oblige me by remaining here, 
and searching for the gold mine. To the under- 
taking which I have mentioned, things seem to 
have concurred very opportunely, in particular 
the ship's running aground in such a manner that 
it was not perceived till she had stuck fast, and 
this at a time when there was neither wave nor 
wind.' The Admiral relates many other things 
by way of showing that it was a piece of good 
fortune, and the determined will of God that the 
ship should be wrecked there, that the Span- 
iards might remain, for as he states, had it not 
been for the treacherous conduct of the master 
and crew, (who were most or all of them his 
countrymen) in not carrying the anchor astern 



174 FIRST VOYAGE 

to haul the ship off, as they were ordered, she 
would not have been wrecked, and thereby they 
should have failed of the knowledge of the coun- 
try which they obtained during the stay, by the 
men whom he intended to leave there. His cus- 
tom was to go on making discoveries, and not 
to stay in any one place above a day, unless com- 
pelled by the wind, as his ship was a dull sailer, 
and unfit fur the purpose of discovery. He lays 
the blame of this upon the people of Palos, in 
not having complied with their agreement to 
furnish the King and Queen with suitable vessels 
for the expedition. The Admiral concludes by 
observing that every piece of the ship was 
saved, there not being lost so much as a thong, 
board, or nail, she being as complete as when she 
first sailed, except what was caused by cutting 
her to get out the casks and merchandize ; all 
these were carried on shore and well secured, 
as above said. He adds that he hopes to find 
at his return from Castile, a ton of gold collected 
by them in trading with the natives, and that 
they will have succeeded in discovering the mine 
and the spices, and all these in such abundance 
that before three years the King and Queen may 
undertake the recovery of the Holy Sepulchre. 
' For I have before protested to your Highness- 
es,' says he, ' that the profits of this enterprise 
shall be employed in the conquest of Jerusalem, 



OP COLUMBUS. 175 

at which your Highnesses smiled and said you 
were pleased, and had the same inclination.' 

Thursday, Dec. 27th. At sunrise the king 
came on board, and told the Admiral that he 
had sent for gold, and wished he could cover him 
all over with it before his departure, or rather, 
that he would not depart at all. He took a meal 
with the Admiral in company with a brother and 
relation of the king, in a very private manner; 
they stated that they wished to go to Castile 
with him. While they were on board, there 
arrived accounts that the caravel Pinta was in a 
river at the end of the island, the Cacique dis- 
patched a canoe thither, in which the Admiral 
ordered a Spaniard to embark. The cacique 
displayed a degree of affection towards the Ad- 
miral that appeared wonderful. The utmost 
diligence was exerted in preparing for their re- 
turn to Castile. 

Friday, Dec. 28th. In order to see to the 
construction of the fort, the Admiral went on 
shore. It seemed that the king espied him as he 
was embarking, for he entered his house in 
haste and sent one of his brothers to receive him. 
The Admiral was conducted to one of the dwell- 
ings given to the Spaniards, which was the 
largest and best in the place. Here there was 
prepared a seat made of the inner bark of the 
palm tree, upon which they caused the Admiral 



176 FIRST VOYAGE 

to sit, the king's brother then sent an attendant 
informing him that the Admiral was there, as if 
he was ignorant of it ; the Admiral imagined that 
this was done to show him so much the more 
honor. The attendant having delivered his mes- 
sage, the king ran to the Admiral, carrying a 
great plate of gold in his hand, which he placed 
about his neck. He remained a night on shore, 
considering what was to be done. 

Saturday, Dec. 29th. At sunrise there came 
on board the caravel a nephew of the king, quite 
a youth, but a person of good understanding and 
courage ; and as the Admiral's constant object 
was to find the place where the gold was pro- 
duced, he made it a practice to question every 
one about it by signs, as they could converse in 
this manner. This young man informed him that 
at the distance of four days' voyage to the east, 
was an isle called Guarionex, and others called 
JWacorix, Jllayonic, Fuma, Cibao, and Coroay* and 
that they contained abundance of gold. The 
names of these places the Admiral wrote 
down, and it afterwards came to the knowl- 
edge of the king's brother, that the youth had 
given this information, whereupon some al- 
tercation ensued between them, as near as the 
Admiral could make out. He had at other times 

* These, according to Las Casas, were the names of dis- 
tricts in the island of Espanola, and not separate isles. 



op colTjmbus. 177 

understood that the king was exerting himself to 
prevent his learning where the gold was produ- 
ced, lest he should go thither after it. 'But 
there is such a quantity of it, and in so many pja- 
ces in the island of Espanola' says the Admiral, 
i that it is a matter of wonder.' At night the 
king sent him a great golden mask, begging for a 
wash-basin and ewer; th.e Admiral supposed that 
he wished for these, to have others made like 
them. The request was complied with. 

Sunday, Dec. 30th. The Admiral went to dine 
on shore, and found that there had arrived five 
kings, who were subject to Guacanagari the king 
abovementioned. All these wore their crowns 
and went in great state, and the Admiral remarks 
to the King and Queen, that their Highnesses 
would have been highly pleased to observe their 
manners. Guacanagari came to receive him on 
landing, and led him by the arm to the house 
where he was entertained the day before ; here 
was an elevated space and seats, upon which he 
made him sit down; he then took his own crown 
from his head and placed it upon that of the Ad- 
miral, who in return took from his neck a splen- 
did collar made of very beautiful beads, and put 
it upon that of the king, also divesting himself of 
a cloak of fine scarlet cloth, which he had put on 
that day, he clothed the king with it. He then 

sent for a pair of buskins which he put upon his 
22 



178 FIRST VOYAGE 

feet, and a large silver ring upon his finger, hav- 
ing heard that the Indians had seen a sailor with 
a ring of that metal, and had tried hard to obtain 
it. The king was greatly pleased with these 
gifts, and two of the other chiefs came to the 
Admiral and gave him each a great plate of gold. 
While they were here, an indian arrived saying he 
had two days since left the caravel Pinta in a har- 
bour at the East. The Admiral returned to his 
vessel, and Vincent Yanez, the captain, told him that 
he had seen rhubarb, and that it was to be found at 
the island Amiga, at the entrance of the harbour 
which was Lamed Mar de Santo Tome, six leagues 
from thence, and that he had recognized both 
the root and the branches. The description giv- 
en of the rhubarb is that it sends forth flowers, 
and berries which appear like green mulberries 
half dried, the stalk near the root is of a fine yel- 
low colour, and the root itself like a large pear. 

Monday, Dec. 31st. This day was occupied 
in taking on board water and wood for their re- 
turn to Spain. The Admiral's object in hasten- 
ing thither was to carry the intelligence as speed- 
ily as possible to the King and Queen, that ships 
might be dispatched to complete the discoveries, 
a vast deal remaining to be done in this way. 
He was, however, unwilling to depart before he 
had examined all this coast towards the east, but 
being with a single vessel, he thought it not pru- 



OF COLUMBUS. 179 

dent to expose himself to the dangers attendant 
upon such an enterprise. He complains that all 
these troubles were occasioned by the Pinta's 
having forsaken him. 

Tuesday, Jan. 1st, 1493. At midnight the 
boat was sent to the island Amiga for rhubarb* 
and returned the next evening with a frail of it, 
not having procured more for want of a spade to 
dig with : what was obtained he preserved to 
show the King and Queen. The canoe which 
had been dispatched in quest of the Pinta, re- 
turned without seeing her. The sailor who went 
in the canoe stated, that at twenty leagues dis- 
tance they met a king, who wore upon his head 
two great plates of gold, and as soon as the in- 
dians whom he accompanied in the canoe spoke 
to him, he took them off. The Admiral be- 
lieved that Gitacanagari had prohibited all the 
others from selling gold to the Spaniards, that it 
might all pass through his hands. He had that 
day sent many canoes to collect it. The Admi- 
ral already knew the places, as above stated, 
where it was so plenty as not to be valued. The 
spicery* as the Admiral says, is also abundant, 
and more valuable than pepper or grains of par- 
adise. He left orders with those that remained, 
to collect as much of it as possible. 

*Indiaij peppet 



180 FIRST VOYAGE 

Wednesday, Jan. 2d. He went on shore in 
the morning, to take leave of Guacanagari. He 
gave him one of his own shirts, and conversing 
with him about the Caribes, who made war up- 
on the people of the island, he determined to give 
him an experiment of the force of fire-arms; for 
this purpose a lombarda was ordered to be load- 
ed, and fired against the side of the ship which 
was on shore; the shot passed through her and 
struck the sea at a distance. He also gave him 
a representation of a battle between parties of 
the crew, armed, informing the Cacique that he 
need not fear the Caribes, even if they should at- 
tack him. All this was done, as he informs us, 
to strike a terror into the inhabitants, and make 
them friendly to the Spaniards left behind. He 
took the king and his attendants along with him 
to his house to dine. At parting he gave a strict 
charge to Diego de Arana, Pedro Gutierrez and 
Rodrigo Escovedo, whom he constituted his lieu- 
tenants over the force of the settlement, that ev- 
ery thing should be well grounded and regulated 
for the service of God and their Highnesses. 
The Cacique displayed great afifection towards 
the Admiral, and indulged a deep sorrow at sep- 
arating from him, especially when he saw him 
about to embark. One of the indians told the 
Admiral that he had ordered his statue to be 



OF COLUMBUS. 181 

made of gold as large as life, and that it was to 
be finished in ten days. He went on board with 
the intention of setting sail, but the wind did not 
permit it. 

He left in this island of Espanola, which the 
indians called Bohio, a fort and thirty-nine men, 
whom he states to have been great friends of 
king Guacanagari. Over these he placed Diego 
de Arana, a native of Cordova, Pedro Gutierrez, 
groom of the king's wardrobe, and Rodrigo de 
Escovedo, a native of Seville, and nephew of 
Fray Rodrigo Perez, with all the powers the 
King and Queen had delegated to him. He left 
them all the goods which had been sent for traf- 
ficking, being a great amount, and every thing 
belonging to the ship which had been wrecked; 
the goods he directed should be traded away for 
gold. To these were added biscuit and wine for 
a year, and the long-boat of the ship, in order 
that they might, (being mariners for the most 
part) at convenient opportunities, undertake the 
discovery of the gold mine, and a place proper 
for building a city, as this port did not suit him, 
and especially because the gold came from the 
east, and the further east they were, the nearer 
to Spain ; he also left them seed for sowing, his 
secretary and alguacil, a ship-carpenter and calk- 
er, a good gunner and engineer, a cooper, a sur- 
geon and a tailor, all seamen. 



182 PIRS*T VOYAGE 

Thurday, Jan. 3d. He did not set sail to-day, 
because the indians belonging to the ships re- 
mained on shore. At night three of them arri- 
ved, and reported that the remainder with their 
wives were coming. The sea was somewhat 
rough, not suffering the boat to lie at the shore. 
The Admiral determined to sail, by the grace of 
God, the next morning. He says that if he had 
had the caravel Pinta with him, he should have 
been certain of obtaining a ton of gold, for in 
that case he should have ventured to coaet along 
these islands, which being alone, he dared not do 
lest an accident should befal him and hinder his 
returning to Castile and informing the King and 
Queen of the discoveries he had made. Even 
had he been certain that the Pinta would arrive 
safe thither, with Martin Alonzo Pinzon, he 
should not have indulged his wish of surveying 
further these parts, as he feared that he might 
give a false relation to the King and Queen, in 
order to escape the punishment which he merit- 
ed for his misconduct in abandoning the Admiral 
without leave, and thereby hinder the benefits 
consequent upon the discovery. He trusted that 
our J^ord would grant him a favorable passage, 
and a remedy for all evils. 

Friday, Jan 4th. At sunrise they weighed an- 
chor and stood out of the harbour with a light 



OP COLUMBUS. 183 

wind; they steered to the NW. passing the shoal 
by a channel much narrower than that by which 
they had entered. These are very good entran- 
ces to sail in to Villa de JVavidad* and contain 
from three to nine fathoms depth of water, ex- 
tending from NW. to SE. Here are shoals 
which reach from Cabo Santo to Cabo de Sierpe 
above six leagues, and extend three leagues into 
the sea. A league from Cabo Santo there are no 
more than eight fathoms water, and within this- 
cape towards the east, are many shoals with nav- 
igable channels. All this coast runs NW. and SE., 
and has a beach throughout its whole extent; 
the land is very level for a space of four leagues 
from the shore, when it becomes diversified with 
lofty mountains, the whole very populous and 
abounding with large towns. They continued 
along the coast to the east in the direction of a 
very tall mountain, finely shaped like a tent, and 
which appeared to be an island, but was found to 
be connected with a low tract of the country. 
This the Admiral named Monte Cristi, it is situa- 
ted exactly east of Cabo Santo at the distance of 
eighteen leagues ;t they were unable to reach it 
this day within six leagues, the wind being light. 

*The name given by Columbus to the fort and settlement 
here, he having arrived on Christmas day. 

tThe true distance is ten leagues! 



184 FIRST VOYAGE 

They found four low sandy islets ,* with a reef 
extending to the N W. and SE. Within is a large 
gulf which reaches from the mountain above- 
mentioned, three leagues to the SW. It is 
throughout very shallow, and abounding with 
banks, and along the coast are many streams not 
navigable, although the sailor whom the Admiral 
sent in the canoe after the Pinta, related that he 
saw a rivert which ships might enter. They an- 
chored here in nineteen fathoms water, at the dis- 
tance of three leagues from Monte Cristi, where 
they remained all night, having kept off from 
land to avoid the numerous shoals hereabouts. 
The Admiral here gives directions for sailing to 
Villa de Navidad, but as the coast is now known, 
it was not thought advisable to copy them. He 
concludes that Cipango must be in this island, 
and that it contains great store of gold, spicesj 
mastick and rhubarb. 

Saturday, Jan 5th. Just before sunrise, they 
set sail with a land-breeze, which afterwards 
shifted to the east. They espied near Monte 
Cristi within an islet, a good harbour where they 
mio;ht anchor that might. Standing to the ESE., 
and afterwards to the SSE., they sailed six 
leagues towards that place and found seventeen 
fathoms' water with a good bottom; they contin- 

* Les Sept Freres. f &* Tapion 



OF COLUMBUS. 185 

ued on three leagues farther with the same 
depth. Afterwards the depth diminished to 
twelve fathoms towards the highest part of the 
mountain, off against Avhich they found nine fath- 
oms, the bottom being all a fine sand. Keeping 
on in this direction, they arrived between the 
mountain and the islet, where they found a fine 
harbour of smooth water, having three fathoms 
and a half depth. Here they anchored, and the 
Admiral landed in a boat. They found on shore, 
fire burning and other indications that fishermen 
had been there. Many stones of variegated col- 
ours were seen; these were similar to those 
found in San Salvador, and were fit from their 
beauty to be used in the construction of churches, 
or royal edifices. Trunk's of the mastick tree 
were also met with. This eminence called Mon- 
te Cristi, says the Admiral, appears at a distance 
like an island; it is lofty, finely shaped, and ac- 
cessible in every part. The country around is 
flat and consists of very beautiful fields. From 
this mountain they discovered a cape toward the 
east, twenty-four miles distant, which was named 
Cabo del Becerro. Within this distance lie sev- 
eral reefs, which extend a couple of leagues to- 
ward the sea; they appear to contain some 
channels which may be entered, but this should 
be done by day, with the boat sent ahead to sound. 

The shore within, for four leagues east of the 
23 



18t) FIRST VOYAGE 

mountain, is a fine beach, and the country back, 
level and beautiful; the rest of the distance, the 
land is very lofty, with tall mountains of a delight- 
ful appearance and under cultivation. In the in- 
terior is a chain of mountains, the finest they had 
seen, and which closely resembles the Sierra of 
Cordova. At a greater distance towards the 
south and SE., are other very high mountains, 
with verdant and beautiful valleys of great extent. 
The whole abounds in streams of water and 
offers views of such variety that the thousandth 
part could not be described. Towards the east 
about a hundred miles distant, appears an emin- 
ence which is like Monte Cristi in size and shape ; 
from thence to the NE. the land is lower. 

Sunday, Jan. 6th. The harbour was found to 
oifer a good shelter against all winds except the 
N. and NE., which however, the Admiral says, 
are not common here, and even from these, a 
safety may be obtained behind the islet. The 
depth is from three to four fathoms. At sunrise 
they set sail and proceeded along the coast, 
which runs to the East. Many reefs of sand 
and rocks are scattered along its extent, of which 
it is necessary to take heed; within them are 
very good harbours, with entrances by channels 
between the shoals. In the afternoon the wind 
blowing strong from the E. a sailor was sent 
to the mast-head to look out for the shallows, 



OF COLUMBUS. 187 

when he discovered the caravel Pinta bearing 
down upon them before the wind ; no good an- 
chorage being found in the neighborhood, the 
Admiral hove about and stood back for Monte 
Cristi from which they had gone ten leagues; 
the Pinta kept him company, and Martin Alonzo 
Pinzon came on board the Nina to make his ex- 
cuses, saying he had parted against his will; he 
offered several reasons for his conduct, which the 
Admiral says were all totally false, as he was actu- 
ated solely by his haughtiness and avidity in 
abandoning him. He confesses himself unable to 
learn the cause of the unfavorable disposition 
Avhich this man had manifested towards him 
throughout the voyage ; but the immediate oc- 
casion of his deserting him, was the information 
he got from an indian which the Admiral had 
placed on board his vessel, that in an isiand 
called Baneque he would find abundance of gold, 
and knowing his vessel to be light and a swift 
sailer he did not hesitate to abandon him as be- 
fore related. The Admiral concealed his re- 
sentment, that he might not aid the machinations 
of Satan in impeding the voyage, as he had hith- 
erto done. It was ascertained that Martin Al- 
onzo, on arriving at Baneque, had not found any 
gold, and had thence returned to the coast of 
Espanola, where from the information of the 
indians he expected to discover the mine. He 



188 



FIRST VOYAGE 



coasted along the island for a distance of fifteen 
leagues approaching near Villa de la Navidad, 
in which progress he spent above twenty days* 
from this account it appeared that the reports 
given by the indians, of his being seen in the 
neighborhood, upon the strength of which 
king Guacanagari sent the canoe after him, were 
correct. The Admiral states that in this time 
he obtained much gold by trading, buying for a 
thong of leather, pieces as big as the two fingers, 
and at times as big as the hand. Of the metal 
thus acquired, he kept half himself, and divided 
the rest among his crew. The Admiral makes 
this remark, ' Thus I perceive, Sovereign 
Princes, that it was a providence of our Lord 
in suffering the ship to be cast away here, it 
being the best place in the whole island for a 
settlement, and nearest to the gold mines.' He 
adds that he had learnt of another island behind 
that ofjuana toward the South, in which there 
was a still greater quantity of gold, and where it 
was found in grains of the size of a bean. In 
Espanola they are met with in the mines as large 
as kernels of wheat.* This first mentioned isle 
was called by the indians Yamaycf From these 
places to the main land, the distance was de- 

* Las Casas states that he has seen lumps of gold found 
in this last island, which would weigh eight pounds. 

| Jamaica*, 



OF COLUMBUS. 189 

scribed as ten days voyage in a canoe, which 
might be sixty or seventy leagues. It was said 
that the people of the continent wore clothing, 
and the Admiral says he was informed by many 
persons of an island towards the East inhabited 
solely by women. 

Monday, Jan. 7th. The Admiral's caravel 
having a leak, he this day ordered her to be 
calked, and sent the sailors ashore for wood. 
They found many mastick and aloe trees. 

Tuesday, Jan. 8th. The wind blowing hard 
from the E. and SE., he did not sail to day, but 
continued providing wood, water, and other ne- 
cessaries for the voyage. It was the Admiral's 
wish to coast along the whole island of Espanola, 
which he might have done upon his course 
homeward, but as he considered that the cap- 
tains of the two caravels were brothers, namely 
Martin Alonzo Pinzon, and Vincent Yanez, and 
that they had a party attached to them, the 
whole of whom had displayed great haugh- 
tiness and avarice, disobeying his commands, re- 
gardless of the honors he had conferred upon 
them, all which misdemeanors as well as the 
treachery of Martin Alonzo, in deserting him, 
he had winked at, without complaining, in order 
not to throw impediments in the way of the 
voyage — he thought it best to return home as 
quickly as possible. He adds, that he possessed 



190 FIRST VOYAGE 

many faithful men among his crews, but resolved 
to put up with the behavior of the refractory 
ones, and not at such an unfavorable season un- 
dertake their punishment. The Admiral went 
in the boat to a river which was situated a 
league to the SSW. from Monte Cristi, and 
where the sailors got the water for the vessels. 
This river* was found wide and of a great depth 
at the mouth. The sand at the bottom, he says, 
was full of fine gold dust, and he imagined that it 
was worn thus in its passage down the river. 
Many large grains were found of the size of 
lentils, and the finer sort was in great abundance. 
The tide being up, he ascended the river a 
stone's throw, in order to reach the fresh water, 
here they filled the casks, and returning to the 
caravel, found bits of gold between the hoops. 
The Admiral named this river Rio del Oro, (Riv- 
er of Gold) it has a narrow and shoal entrance, 
but immediately within there is great depth. Its 
distance from Villa de la Navidad is seventeen 
leagues,t within this extent are many other 
streams and in particular three, which from their 
superior size, the Admiral thought must contain 
more gold than the one he visited. This last is 

* St. Yago 

t The true distance is only eight leagues. 



OF COLUMBUS. 19 1 

nearly as large as the Guadalquivir at Cordova, and 
is not twenty leagues from the mines.* The Ad- 
miral concludes by saying that he thought it not 
necessary to take on board any of the golden 
sand, as their Highnesses had it within their 
reach at the port of Navidad, and especially be- 
cause he wished to return with all speed, and 
communicate the news of his discoveries, and 
get rid of the disagreeable society of his refrac- 
tory crew. 

W ednesday, Jan. 9th. At midnight they set 
sail with a Southeasterly wind, and steered to 
the ENE., in the evening they arrived and an- 
chored under the shelter of a cape sixty milesf 
East of Monte Cristi, this he named Punta Roxa.% 
Here were extensive shoals, on which account 
they did not leave the place through the night. 
The land from Monte Cristi to the place where 
they anchored, was high but level, with beautiful 
fields, at a distance back appeared a chain of 
fine mountains running from E. to W., covered 
with cultivation and presenting a most enchant- 
ing view; streams of water were also in abun^ 
dance. All along the coast there are great mul- 

* There were mines within four leagues, according to 
Las Casas. 

t Forty-two miles according to other accounts. 

J Punta Isabelica. 



192 FIRST VOYAGE 

litudes of turtle, of which the sailors took some 
at Monte Cristi, as they came on shore to lay 
their eggs. They were as big as a buckler of 
the largest size. The Admiral relates, that 
when on his visit to the Rio del Oro yesterday, 
he saw three mermaids standing high out of the 
water, they had faces something similar to those of 
human beings, but were not so handsome as it was 
customary to represent them : he adds that he has 
formerly seen them in Guinea, upon the Pepper 
coast.* This night, he says, he intends to set 
sail in the name of our Lord, without suffering 

* These mermaids (serenas) were perhaps, as the Span- 
ish editor suggests, Manaties, which Oviedo in his Natural 
History of the Indies thus describes. ' The Manati is a 
large sea-animal, exceeding the shark in size, and of an 
ugly appearance, resembling one of those wine bags, used 
for containing must in Medina del Campo and Arevalo. 
Its head and eyes are like those of a calf, and it has a 
pair of large stumps in the place of arms, which it uses 
for swimming. The creature is very tame, and is accus- 
tomed to approach near the shore, where if it espies any 
herbs growing near the water, it feeds upon them. They 
are shot with cross-bows, &.c. Cap. 85. — see also Herrera. 
I. 5. 5. Gomara C. 31. and Charlevoix, Hist, de St. Do- 
mingue, Liv. I. who describes this animal as furnished with 
paps, with which it suckles its young. They give some 
relations about its having been tamed. The last author 
remarks, ' Le premier qui s'est imagine que ce poisson 
pouvoit bien etre la Sirene des Anciens fut Christophe 
Celomb, lequel donnoit volontiers dans tout le merveilleux 
qui pouvoit rendre ses decouvertes plus celebres.' It must 
be confessed that if Columbus took a Manati for a Mermaid, 
he could not have failed to notice its deficiency in one 
distinguishing quality ascribed to this fabulous being, for as 
Gomara observes ' tan feo es, que mas ser no piiede." 1 



OF COLUMBUS. 193 

himself to be detained here longer by any thing; 
having accomplished the main object of his en- 
terprise ; and as he is anxious to free himself 
from the troubles which Martin Alonzo causes 
him, and inform the King and Queen of his voy- 
age and performances, ' after which' says he 'I 
shall no more suffer the practices of worthless 
and malignant persons who behave with such 
disobedience and want of respect to one who has 
shown them so distinguished favors.' 

Thursday, Jan. 10th. They set sail from their 
anchorage, and at sunset came to a river* 
which the Admiral named Rio de Gracia, its 
distance was three leagues to the SE. They 
anchored at its mouth, finding a convenient spot 
on the Eastern side. There is a bank at the 
entrance, having but two fathoms water, and the 
channel very narrow. Within is a harbour well 
inclosed, but abounding in worms, from which the 
caravel Pinta had suffered severely, she having 
been, while absent from the Admiral, sixteen 
days here, trading for gold, the thing Martin Al- 
onzo was in quest of. It was ascertained that 
this man having learnt from the indians that the 
Admiral was upon the coast, and he could not 
miss him, he resolved to return to his company, 
having endeavored to procure all his crew to swear 
that they had been there but six days; but his 

* Rio Chuzona Chico, 

24 



194 FIRST VOYAGE 

villainy, says the Admiral, was so apparent, that 
it could not be concealed. He had made regu- 
lations that the half of all the gold discovered, 
or obtained by baiter, should be his property; 
and at leaving this place took six of the indians, 
four men and two girls, on board his vessel by 
force ; these the Admiral ordered to be clothed, 
and sent to their homes, ' which' he says i is for 
the service of your Highnesses, for they are all 
your Highnesses subjects, especially those of this 
island, where the people should receive all favor 
and respect from us, as the place contains so 
many tine countries with gold and spicery, and 
the settlement which has been made.' 

Friday, Jan. 11th. At midnight they sailed from 
Rio de Gracia with a land-breeze, proceeding 
four leagues to the E. toward a cape which the 
Admiral named Belprado. SE. from this, at 
a distance, according to his account, of eight 
leagues, is a mountain which he called Monte de 
Plata* E. by S., eighteen leagues distant, is a 
cape which he named Cabo del Angel. Between 
th*3 and Monte de Plata is a guli',t bordered by 
a most charming country, consisting of lofty and 
beautiful fields extending far into th^ land. At 
a distance back is a chain of mountains running 
from E. to W., very tall and presenting a beau- 

* Silver Mountain. It is very lofty, and always covered 
with a white cloyd, which gives it a silvery appearance. 

fPort of St. Jago. 



OP COLUMBUS. 195 

tiful view. At the foot of the mountain above- 
mentioned is an excellent harbour* having four- 
teen fathoms depth at the mouth. The moun- 
tain is lofty and handsome, covered with settle- 
ments, and, in the Admiral's opinion contains fine 
streams of water and much gold. Four leagues 
E. by S. of Cabo del Angel is a point which he 
called Punta del Hierro.'t Four leagues farther 
on is another, named by him, Punta Scca.1[. 
Another called Cabo Redondo,§ six leagues be- 
yond that. East from this last, is another, which 
he named Cabo Frances, beyond which is a bay|j 
but which did not appear a good anchoring 
place. A league from the bay is a cape called 
Cabo del Buen tiempo, and another league S. by 
E. from this, a cape which he named Tajado. 
To the South another was seen, apparently 
fifteen leagues distant. They made a great pro- 
gress this day, as both the wind and the currents 
were favorable. Not daring to anchor for fear 
of the shoals, they lay to all night. 

Saturday, Jan. 12th. At day-break they 
stood to the East with a fresh breeze, and sailed 
by sunrise twenty miles, the following two hours 
twenty-four miles, when they discovered land 

* Port Plate. |Punta Macuris. 

J Punta Sesua. § Cabo dela Roca. 

II Bahia Escocesa. 



196 FIRST VOYAGE 

the South* forty-eight miles distant. They 
found they had gone in the night, twenty-eight 
miles to the NNE. Standing for the land they 
discovered a cape which was named Cabo de 
Padre y Hijo^ as it has toward the East two cliffs 
of unequal size. Two leagues to the East, an open- 
ing was descried between two large mountains, 
which proved to be a fine large harbour with a 
good entrance. Being so early, they did not 
enter, not wishing to lose time, as the wind then 
blew from the NN W., although for the most 
part they had found it to blow from the E. 
Continuing their course E. they came to a cape 
which the Admiral called Cabo del Enamorado\. 
(the lover's cape) it was of craggy rock and very 
high, at a distance of thirty-two miles E. of the 
harbour abovementioned, named by him Puerto 
Sacro. From this place they discovered anoth- 
er promontory§ loftier and handsomer than the 
last, of a round shape, and all of rock, like Cape 
St. Vincent in Portugal; it was twelve miles E. 
of Cabo Knamorado. Arrived off this last, they 
discovered between these two headlands a very 
large bay|| of three leagues in breadth, with a 

* The peninsula of Samana. 
f Cape of the Father and Son. 
\ Cabo Cabron. §Cabo Samana. 

|| Baye de Samana. 



OF COLUMBUS. 197 

little isle in the middle. They found the water 
deep in the mouth near the shore, where they 
anchored in twelve fathoms, and sent the boat 
for water, and to converse with the inhabitants, 
but they all fled. The Admiral stopped here 
wishing to ascertain if this land was part of Es- 
panola. He was astonished at the great size of 
the island. 

Sunday, Jan. 13th. They did not sail, as no 
land breeze blew. The Admiral wished to go 
in search of a better harbour, as this was some- 
what unsheltered, and he was desirous of wit- 
nessing the conjunction of the sun, moon, and 
Mercury in opposition to Jupiter, which occa- 
sions high winds. The boat was sent on shore 
to procure ajes for provision; they landed upon 
a beach in the neighborhood, and found several 
indians with bows and arrows : they entered into 
conversation with them, purchased their arms, 
and persuaded one of their number to accom- 
pany them on board the caravel, to visit the Ad- 
miral. This man was of a more unpleasing ap- 
pearance than any that had yet been seen ; his 
face was smutted all over with charcoal, though 
in all parts they are accustomed to paint them- 
selves with a variety of colours. His hair was 
long, gathered and tied behind, and adorned with 
parrot's feathers. He was totally naked. The 
Admiral took him for one of the Caribes who 



198 FIRST VOYAGE 

were man-eaters, and believed that the gulf seen 
yesterday was a separation between Espanola 
and another island. He asked him for the Ca- 
ribes, and he answered by signs that their land 
was to the East in the neighborhood ; the Ad- 
miral says he saw it the day previous, before 
entering the bay. The indians informed him 
that much gold existed there, and in masses as 
big as the stern of the caravel. He called the 
metal tuob, not understanding it by caona, as it 
was called in the other part of the island, nor by 
nozay, which was the name of it in San Salvador, 
and the other islands. Copper, or base gold, was 
called in Espanola tuob. The indian also spake 
of the island of Matinino, which according to 
his account, was peopled by women, without a 
single man, and contained much tuob ; he describ- 
ed it as situated East of Carib. Another island 
containing gold he called Goanin* The Admiral 
says he had been informed of these islands some 
time before, and by several persons. In all the 
islands they had visited, he declares that the in- 
habitants entertained great fear of Carib, which 
in some parts they called Caniba, but in Espa- 
nola Carib. He thinks them to be a warlike 

■ Goanin, according to Las Casas, was the name given 
bv the indians to a sort of inferior gold, which emitted an 
odor, and was highly prized by them. Carib was the In- 
dian name for the island of Porto Rico. 



©P COLUMBUS. 199 

nation, as they make incursions upon the other 
islands and devour the prisoners whom they take. 
He understood some of the words which this in- 
dian used, and by their help obtained the above 
intelligence ; the indians on board understood 
more, although there was a difference in their 
dialects, occasioned by their countries being so 
remote from one another. The indian above 
mentioned, after having been feasted, was sent 
away with a present of beads, and pieces of red 
and green cloth, the Admiral requesting him to 
bring back gold, if he possessed any, which was 
suspected from some things he carried with him. 
When the boat arrived at the land, they discov- 
ered among the woods, fifty-five indians, armed 
with bows; they were all naked, with coarse 
hair, as long as the women wear it in Castile ; 
the back part of their heads was adorned with 
bunches of the feathers of parrots and other 
birds. The indian in the boat, landing, joined 
the others, and prevailed with them to lay down 
their arms, which consisted of bows and arrows 
with heavy wooden swords. They then came 
to the boat, and the crew landed and went to 
purchasing their arms, having been so ordered 
by the iVdmiral. The indians having sold two 
bows, refused to part with any more, but pre- 
pared to attack the Spaniards, and running back 
for their arms, returned bringing cords, for the 



200 FIRST VOYAGE 

purpose, as it seemed, of binding their prisoners. 
The Spaniards finding themselves about to be 
attacked, prepared for it, having many times 
before been instructed by the Admiral to be 
upon their guard, and as the indians were run- 
ning to the assault, fell upon them, wounding 
several in the breast with their cross-bows, and 
one upon the posteriors with a sword. The in- 
dians finding they were likely to have the worst 
of the affray, although their enemies were but 
seven, and they above fifty, took to flight every 
one, leaving their weapons scattered here and 
there. The Spaniards would have killed many, 
but the v pilot who commanded them, would not 
permit it. They then returned on board the 
caravel, and informed the Admiral of the adven- 
ture, who states that he regretted it on some ac- 
counts, but was otherwise glad, because these 
indians, whom he was now confident were Ca- 
ribes, and a savage, man-eating race, would enter- 
tain a dread of the Spaniards, and if the men 
whom he had left at Navidad, should make a 
voyage hither in their boat, the natives would be 
cautious of offending them. Many smokes were 
seen up in the country, as had been observed all 
over the island. 

Monday, Jan. 14th. The Admiral wishing to 
make prisoners of some of the indians, intended 
to dispatch the boat to land in the night, to visit 
their house* for this purpose, but the wind blow- 



OP COLUMBUS. 201 

ing strong from the E. and NE., occasioned a 
rough sea which prevented it. When the day 
came, a great many of the natives were seen on 
shore, and the Admiral sent the boat well armed 
to land. The indians all came crowding around 
her, and among them the one who had visited 
the caravel and received the presents the day 
before. With these also came a king of the 
country, who had dispatched this indian with some 
beads to give the boat's crew in token of securi- 
ty and peace. The king with three of his men, 
entered the boat and went on board the caravel. 
The Admiral treated them with biscuit and 
honey, and gave the king, a red cap, some beads, 
and red cloth ; to the others he presented pieces 
of cloth, and dismissed them all highly pleased 
to land, the king informing him that he would 
bring him the next day a golden mask, and that 
there was much of the metal at this place, as 
well as in Carib and Matinino. The Admiral 
here states that the caravels were very leaky 
about the keels, and complains much of the 
calkers at Palos, who did their work very badly, 
and when this had been discovered by him, and 
he endeavored to make them mend it, had ab- 
sconded. But he says that in spite of the bad 
state of his vessels he confides in our Lord, that as 
he has brought him to these parts, so he will in 
bis great mercy return him; for his Heavenly 
25 



202 FIRST rOYAGE 

Majesty knew what struggles it had cost him to 
set on foot this enterprise, and that he alone had 
favored him before the King and Queen, all 
others in the most unreasonable manner opposing 
him. He adds, ' these last have been the cause 
that the royal crown of your Highnesses does not 
possess at this day an hundred millions of reve- 
nue more than when 1 entered your service, 
from which time it will be seven years the twen- 
tieth day of this month of January, without men- 
tioning the increase to arrive hereafter. But Al- 
mighty God will remedy all.' 

Tuesday, Jan. 15th. The Admiral wished to 
sail, as his stay could no longer be of any profit, 
on account of the rupture with the indians. He 
says he has discovered that most of the gold is in 
the neighborhood of Villa de la JVavidad, and 
that in the island of Carib, there is much copper, 
as also in Matinino. To explore the first, he 
thinks will be difficult, on account of the ferocity 
of the inhabitants, and the last is stated to be 
peopled solely by women. The island of Carib 
was seen from this place, and he determined, as 
they both lay in his route, to visit them and cap- 
ture some of the natives. He sent the boat to 
land, where they found that the king had not ar- 
rived, his town being at a distance ; he, however, 
sent his crown, which was of gold, as he had 
promised the day before, and many of his men 



OP COLUMBUS. 203 

came bringing cotton, bread and ajes, all armed 
with bows and arrows. The traffic between 
them being finished, there came four young indians 
on board the caravel, where they gave so good an 
account to the Admiral, of the island to the east? 
which lay in his course homeward, that he deter- 
mined to take them along wit!) him. Here he re- 
lates that he had discovered no iron nor any oth- 
er metal but those already mentioned, in these 
quarters, although he acknowledges it impossible 
to learn much of the country while they were 
ignorant of the language, and were several days 
in making the people understand a single thing. 
The bows here, he describes as equal in size to 
those of France and England, and the arrows just 
like the javelins used by the inhabitants of the 
other isles, which are made of stalks of the cane 
while in seed; they are very straight, about a 
yard and a half in length, and doubled, with a. 
sharp piece of wood a span and a half long at 
the end; at the point of this some affix a fishes 
tooth, but the most of them, grass. These ar- 
rows are shot in a manner which prevents their 
doing much harm. A great deal of cotton was 
found at this place very fine and long. Mastick 
trees were in abundance, and the bows of the in- 
dians appeared to be made of yew. The land 
was found to produce much aji, which is the pep- 
per of the inhabitants, and more valuable than 



204 FIRST VOYAGE 

the common sort ; they deem it very wholesome 
and eat nothing without it. Fifty caravels might 
be loaded every year with this commodity at 
Espanola. The Admiral states that he found in 
this bay a great deal of that sort of weed which 
they met at sea upon their passage ; on which ac- 
count he imagined there were islands extending 
to the east as far as the place where they first 
perceived it, as he held it for certain that this 
weed grew in shoal water near the land. He 
adds if the above be correct, these Indies 
must be very near the Canary Isles, in his opin- 
ion less than four hundred leagues distant. 

Wednesday Jan. 16th. Three hours before 
day they set sail from this gulf, which the Admi- 
ral named Golfo de las Flechas* (the Gulf of Ar- 
rows.) They had at first a land breeze, which 
afterwards shifted to the west, when they steer- 
ed east by north, for the island of Carib, which 
contained the people of whom all the other in- 
dians stood in terror, as they were accustomed to 
scour all those seas with innumerable fleets of 
canoes, and devour their prisoners. One of the 
indians whom they had taken at the place last 
quitted, directed them upon the route. After 
sailing, as they judged sixty-four miles, the in- 
dians signified to them that the island was to the 

*Baye de Samana, 



or columbus. 205 

SE.,* when they altered their course and pro- 
ceeded in that direction, and having sailed a couple 
of leagues, the wind freshened and blew very 
favorably for their return to Spain. The crews 
began to despond at leaving their course home- 
ward, on account of the leaky state of the ves- 
sels, there being no remedy for it but the help of 
God, and the Admiral found himself constrained 
to change his course anew, and steer directly for 
Spain. He accordingly shaped his route NE. by 
E., and sailed by sunset forty-eight miles or 
twelve leagues. The indians informed him that 
in this direction he would meet with the island 
of Mcttinino, which was inhabited by women ; 
the Admiral was very desirous to visit the place 
and carry five or six of the inhabitants to Spain, 
but doubted whether the indians knew the 
course thither. Besides he was unwilling to be 
detained any longer with his leaky vessels. He 
says, however, that the fact respecting this island 
is certain, and that the inhabitants are visited at 
particular times of the year, by men from the isle 
of Carib, which is about tenor a dozen leagues dis- 
tant, and the male children which are born, they 
send to that place, but keep the females them- 
selves. The Admiral believed these islands to 
be at the SE., and not more than fifteen or twen- 

* Porto Rico 



206 FIRST VOYAGE 

ty leagues from the place whence they had sail- 
ed, but he thought the indians were unable to 
point out the way. Losing sij^ht of a cape in 
Espanola, which he named San Theramo* and 
which bore west, sixteen leagues distant, they sail- 
ed twelve leagues E. by N. The weather was 
very fine. 

Thursday, Jan. 17th. At sunset yesterday, the 
wind abated a little, and they sailed for fourteen 
glasses, each of half an hour or a trifle less, till 
the first watch, going four miles an hour, which 
made twenty-eight miles. The wind then fresh- 
ened and they sailed under it the whole watch, 
which was ten glasses, and afterwards six more 
till sunrise, at eight miles an hour, making in all 
eighty-four miles or twenty-one leagues NE. by 
E. By sunset they sailed forty-four miles or 
eleven leagues further, in an easterly direction. 
Here a pelican come on board the caravel, and 
afterwards another. They saw much sea-weed.t 
Friday, Jan. 18th. Kept on their course at 
nio-ht E. by S., and sailed forty miles or ten 
leagues. Afterwards steered SE. by E. till sun- 
rise thirty miles, which are seven leagues and a 
half. After sunrise sailed all day with light 

* Cape Samana. 

fThere is a shoal in this neigborhood, which they passed 
four leagues to the south. 



OP COLUMBUS. 207 

winds, from NE. and E., steering N. and 
NE., going in the whole sixty miles or fifteen 
leagues. But little sea-weed was seen, and the 
Admiral says that yesterday and to-day the ocean 
was covered with tunnies, which as he thinks 
were accustomed to direct their course from 
these parts, to the fisheries where the Spaniards 
take them. A bird called a rabihorcado, which 
flew about the caravel, and then went off to the 
SE,. caused the Admiral to think there were 
islands in that quarter.* 

Saturday, Jan. 19th. In the night they sailed 
fifty-six miles N. by E., and sixty-four NE. by N. 
After sunrise the wind blew fresh from ESE., 
and they stood NE. and afterward NE. by N., 
going eighty-four miles, or twenty-one leagues. 
The sea was covered with tunnies of a small size, 
and they saw pelicans, tropic birds, and rabihor- 
cadoes. 

Sunday, Jan. 20th. The wind died away at 
night, and afterwards blew in squalls ; they sail- 
ed twenty-miles to the NE. After sunrise elev- 
en miles to the SE., and then thirty-six miles or 
nine leagues to the NNE. A vast number of small 
tunnies were seen; the air was fresh and soft as 
at Seville in April or May, and the sea 'many 
thanks to God' says the Admiral, always smooth. 

* The Antilles or windward islands lay in this direction. 



208 FIRST VOYAGE 

Rabihorcadoes, pardelas t and many other birds 
appeared. 

Monday, Jan. 21st. Yesterday, after sunset 
they sailed N. by E., with the wind E. and NE., 
going eight miles an hour till midnight, which 
make fifty-six miles. Afterwards they steered 
NNE., and sailed at the same rate through 
out the night, making a hundred and four miles, 
or twenty-six leagues. After sunrise kept on the 
same course, with the wind at E., sometimes va- 
rying their course to the NE., sailing in eleven 
hours, eighty-eight miles or twenty-one leagues, 
subtracting one which was lost in waiting to 
speak with the Pinta. The air was found cool, 
and this was expected to increase every day as 
they advanced toward the north, and had longer 
nights. A great many tropic birds, pardelas and 
other fowl were seen, but not so great a multi- 
tude of fish as before, which was thought to be 
owing to the greater coolness of the water. 
Weeds also in abundance. 

Tuesday, Jan. 22d. After sunset last evening 
they stood to the NNE., with the wind from E. 
to SE., and sailed eight miles an hour for five 
glasses, adding three which were sailed before 
the watch, in all eight, which make seventy-two 
miles or eighteen leagues. Afterwards sailed NE. 
and N. six glasses, eighteen miles further. Then 
four glasses of the second watch to the NE., six 



OP COLUMBUS. 20$ 

miles an hour, which make three leagues. Then 
till sunrise ENE., eleven glasses, six miles an hour, 
making eight leagues and a quarter. Then 
ENE. till eleven o'clock in the forenoon, thirty- 
two miles, when it fell calm and thev made no 
further progress. The indians went into the 
sea to swim. Tropic birds and much weed were 
seen. 

Wednesday, Jan. 23d. Last night there were 
many changes of the wind; making all the cus- 
tomary calculations and allowances, they suppo- 
sed their course had been eighty-four miles or 
twenty-one leagues NE. by N. The Admiral 
hove to many times for the Pinta, she sailing 
badly upon the win<Jj having little aid from her 
mizzen, as the mast was unsound. The Admiral 
remarks that if the captain, Martin Alonzo Pinzon 
had taken as much care to provide himself with 
a new mast in the Indies, where there are so 
many fine trees, as he had exerted in running 
away from him in the hope of loading his vessel 
with gold, they would not have laboured under 
that inconvenience. They saw many tropic 
birds and much weed ; the sky was totally over- 
cast, but no rain: the sea all the time smooth as 
a river, 'many thanks be to God' says the Admi- 
ral. After sunrise they bore away to the NE., 
and sailed thirty miles, or seven leagues and a 
half; then ENE. as much further. 
2fi 



210 FIRST VOYAGE 

Thursday, Jan. 24th. All last night the wind 
kept shifting toward the NE., and they sailed 
forty-four miles, or eleven leagues ; after sunrise 
ENE. fourteen leagues. 

Friday, Jan. 25th. At night, sailed ENE., 
three glasses, nine leagues and a half, then NNE. 
six miles further. After sunrise, the wind dying 
away, they made no more than twenty-eight 
miles, or seven leagues toward the ENE., till 
night. The sailors took a tunny and a very 
large shark, which was a seasonable supply of 
food, for they had nothing to eat but bread and 
ajes from India. 

Saturday, Jan 26th. At night continued their 
course East by South, fifty-six miles, or fourteen 
leagues. After sunrise stood Southeasterly, and 
sailed by eleven o'clock forty miles. Then hove 
about and stood upon the wind twenty-four miles 
or six leagues to the North. 

Sundav, Jan. 27th. After sunset steered 
NE. and N., sailing five miles an hour for thirteen 
hours, which make sixty-five miles, or sixteen 
leagues and a half. At sunrise sailed NE., 
twenty-four miles, or six leagues, till noon, and 
from that time till sunset, three leagues to the 
ENE. 

Monday, Jan. 28th. All night steered ENE, 
thirty-six miles or nine leagues, and from sunrise 
till night, twenty miles further in the same direc- 



X 



OF COLUMBUS. 2 1 1 

tion. The air was soft and mild. Saw tropic- 
birds, pardehs, and much wee'd. 

Tuesday, Jan. 29. Steered ENE. in the night, 
with a Southerly wind, sailing thirty-nine miles or 
nine leagues and a half. By day eight leagues 
further. The air mild, as in Castile in April, and 
the sea smooth. Many dories leaped on board. 

Wednesday, Jan. 30th. At night sailed seven 
leagues ENE. In the day, thirteen leagues and 
a half South by East. Saw tropic-birds, and 
abundance of tunnies and weed. 

Thursday, Jan. 31st. Sailed in the night 
thirty miles North by East, then NE., thirty-five 
miles, in all sixteen leagues. From sunrise till 
night, steered ENE., thirteen leagues and a half. 
Tropic birds and pardelas were seen. 

Friday, Feb. 1st. In the night sailed ENE., 
sixteen leagues and a half; in the day, twenty- 
nine leagues and a quarter, in the same direction. 
The sea very smooth, ' thanks to God,' says the 
Admiral. 

Saturday, Feb. 2d. During the night sailed 
ENE. forty miles or ten leagues. In the day, 
with the same wind astern, sailed seven miles an 
hour, going in eleven hours, seventy-seven miles, 
which are nineteen leagues and a quarter. The 
sea very smooth, thanks to God, and the air soft. 
The sea was so covered with weeds that those 



212 FIRST VOYAGE 

unacquainted with them would have taken them 
for shoals. Pardelas were seen. 

Sunday, Feb. 3d. The wind astern at night, 
and the sea smooth, thanks to God, they sailed 
twenty-nine leagues. The polar star appeared 
as high as at Cape St. Vincent, but the motion of 
the vessel would not allow them to take its alti- 
tude with the astrolabe or quadrant. In the day 
continued their course ENE., sailing ten miles an 
hour, going in eleven hours twenty-seven leagues. 

Monday, Feb. 4th. At night, steered East by 
North, going ten and eleven miles an hour ; sailed 
a hundred and thirty miles, which are thirty-two 
leagues and a half. The sky was very cloudy, 
with rain, and the air began to grow cold, for 
which reason the Admiral says he knew he had 
not yet reached the Azores. After sunrise, altered 
their course to the East. All day sailed seventy- 
seven miles, which are nineteen leagues and a 
quarter. 

Tuesday, Feb. 5th. All night sailed East. 
fifty-four miles, or thirteen leagues and a half; in 
the day ten miles an hour, for eleven hours, mak- 
ing a hundred and ten miles, or twenty-seven 
leagues and a half. Saw pardelas and some small 
sticks, a sign that they were near land. 

Wednesday, Feb. 6th. In the night steered 
East, eleven miles an hour, going a hundred and 
forty-three miles, or thirty-five leagues and a 



OF COLUMBUS. 213 

quarter, in thirteen hours. Saw many pardelas 
and other birds. In the day sailed fourteen miles 
an hour, making, day and ni<>'ht about seventy-four 
leagues. Vincent Yanez said that this morning 
the island of Flores bore North, and that of Ma- 
deira, East. Roldan stated that the island of 
Fayal or that of St. Gregory bore NE., and 
Porto Santo, East. Many weeds were seen. 

Thursday, Feb. 7th. All night sailed East, 
ten miles an hour, making in thirteen hours, a 
hundred and thirty miles, or thirty-two leagues 
and a half. In the day, eight miles an hour, 
eighty-eight miles or twenty-two leagues. This 
morning the Admiral was by his reckoning, sev- 
enty-five leagues south of the island of Flores. 
The reckoning of Pedro Alonzo, the pilot, carri- 
ed him as far North as a point between Tercera 
and Santa Maria, and to the East, twelve leagues 
beyond the meridian of Madeira. The sailors 
saw a great deal of weed, different from that ob- 
served before, and of that sort which abounds in 
the Azores. Afterwards met with it of the for- 
mer kind. 

Friday, Feb. 8th. At night sailed three miles 
an hour, to the E. for some time, then SE.; going 
twelve leagues during the night. From sunrise 
till noon, sailed twenty-seven miles, and from that 
time to sunset, as much farther; in all, thirteen 
leagues SSE. 



214 FIRST VOYAGE 

Saturday, Feb, 9th. Part of the night sailed 
SSE. three leagues, then S. by E., afterwards 
NE. five leagues till ten o'clock, thence till night, 
nine leagues to the East. 

Sunday, Feb. 10th. After sunset sailed E. all 
night, going a hundred and thirty miles, or 
thirty-two leagues and a half; from sunrise till 
night sailed nine miles an hour, making ninety- 
nine miles, or twenty four leagues and three 
quarters. On board the Admiral's caravel, reck- 
onings were kept by Vincent Yanez, the two 
pilots, Sancho Ruiz and Pedro Alonzo Nino, and 
Roldan. All these, by their own accounts were 
far beyond the Azores to the E., and no one so 
far north as Santa Maria, which is the most south- 
erly of the group, so that their reckonings 
brought them in the neighborhood of Madeira or 
Porto Santo. The Admiral w 7 as much behind 
them, finding himself that night S. of the island 
of Flores, and in the latitude of Nafe in Africa. 
Thus their accounts made them nearer to Spain 
than his by an hundred and fifty leagues. He 
remarks that by the grace of God they shall find 
upon making land, who is the most correct. 
He further observes that upon their passage 
out they sailed two-hundred and sixty-three 
leagues before they met with the weeds. 

Monday, Feb. 11th. Kept on their course in 
the night, twelve miles an hour, and sailed 



OF COLUMBUS. 215 

thirty-nine leagues ; in the day, sixteen and a 
half. Saw many birds, on which account they 
thought themselves near land. 

Tuesday, Feb. 12th. Sailed E. six miles an 
hour through the night, going seventy-three 
miles, or eighteen leagues and a quarter. Here 
the wind began to blow furiously with a heavy 
sea, and if the caravel had not been a good ves- 
sel, and well prepared, they would have been in 
danger of perishing. During the day they sailed 
eleven or twelve leagues with much labour and 
hazard. 

Wednesday, Feb. 13th. From sunset till day, 
they laboured exceedingly with a high wind and 
furious sea ; it lightened three times in the NE., 
which in the Admiral's opinion was a sign of a 
violent tempest from that, or the opposite quar- 
ter. They scudded under bare poles most of 
the night, and afterwards set a little sail and 
went fifty-two miles or thirteen leagues. In the 
day the wind remitted somewhat, and then 
sprung up with more violence ; the sea was 
terrible, running cross and causing the vessel to 
labour excessively. They made a progress of 
fifty-five miles, or thirteen leagues and a half. 

Thursday, Feb 14th. In the night the wind 
increased, and the sea was most tremendous, the 
waves crossing and dashing against one another, 
so that the vessel was overwhelmed, and not able 



216 FIRST VOYAGE 

to get out from between them. The foresail 
was set very low, in order to carry her somewhat 
out of her dangerous situation; they stood under 
it for three hours, going twenty miles, when the 
wind and sea increasing, they began to drive be- 
fore it, not having any other remedy. At the 
same time, the Pinta, in which was Martin 
Alonzo, began to scud likewise, and they soon 
lost sight of her, although the two caravels made 
signals to one another by lights, until from the 
fury of the storm they were no longer percepti- 
ble. The Admiral drove all night to the NE. by 
E., going fifty-four miles or thirteen leagues. 
At sunrise the wind still increased, and the cross 
sea grew more and more terrible ; they set the 
foresail again, low, to carry them out from be- 
tween the waves, among which they expected to 
be crushed. They kept to the ENE., and after- 
wards to the NE. going in six hours thus, seven 
leagues and a half. The Admiral ordered that 
lots should be cast for one of them to go on a 
pilgrimage to St. Mary of Guadalupe and carry 
a wax taper of five pounds weight ; he caused 
them all to take an oath that the one on whom 
the lot fell, should perform the pilgrimage. For 
this purpose as many peas were selected as 
there wore persons on board, one of them 
was marked with a cross, and the whole shaken 
together in a cap. The first who put his hand 



OP COLUMBUS. 217 

in, was the Admiral, and he drew the crossed 
pea. So the lot fell upon him, and he looked 
upon himself as bound to accomplish the pil- 
grimage. Another lot was taken for a pilgrim- 
age to St. Mary of Loretto, in the marc of Anco- 
na, territory of the pope, which is the house 
where Our Lady has performed so many mira- 
cles, this fell upon a sailor of Puerto de Santa 
Maria, called Pedro de Villa; the Admiral 
promised to furnish him with money for his ex- 
penses. A third lot was determined upon, for 
the selection of a person who should watch a 
whole night in St. Clara de Moguer, and have a 
mass said there ; it fell again upon the Admiral. 
After this, he and all the crew made a vow to 
go in procession, clothed in penitential garments, 
to the first church dedicated to Our Lady 
which they should meet with on arriving at land, 
and there pay their devotions. 

Besides these general vows, every individual 
made his private one, all expecting to be lost, so fu- 
rious was the rage of the hurricane. Their danger 
was increased by the want of ballast in the vessel, 
as their provisions were mostly consumed, and their 
wine and water gone, which deficiencies the Ad- 
miral had neglected to supply among the islands, 
because he wished to husband his time in making 
discoveries, and expected to take in ballast at the 
isle of the women, which he intended to visit, 
27 



218 



FIRST VOYAGE 



All the remedy they could devise in the present 
extremity was to fill with sea-water such empty 
casks as they could get at, and in this manner 
they obtained some relief. 

Here the Admiral states the circumstances 
which caused him to fear that our Lord would 
suffer them to perish, and others which gave 
him hope that he would bring them safe to 
land, and not allow the important information 
they were carrying to the King and Queen to 
be lost. He seems to have felt the most anxious 
desire to have his great discovery known, so that 
the world might be convinced the assertions made 
by him had been correct, and that he had accom- 
plished what he professed himself abie to do ; 
the thought of this not being done, gave him the 
greatest inquietude, and he was perpetually in ap- 
prehensions as the smallest trifle miglit defeat 
his whole undertaking.* He ascribes this to his 
want of faith and confidence in the Divine Provi- 
dence, but comforts himself in reflecting upon the 
many mercies God had shown him in having ena- 
bled him to conquerall his adversities and hindran- 
ces in Castile, and accomplish his great discovery. 
And as he had made the service of God the aim 
and business of his undertaking, and he had hith- 
erto favoured him in granting all his desire, he 
indulges a hope that he will continue that favour, 

* Cada mosquito le podia perturbar y impediar. 



OF COLUMBUS. 219 

and secure him a safe arrival. Especially he re- 
•flected that he had delivered him when he had 
much greater reason for fear, upon the outward 
voyage, at which time the crew rose up against 
him, and with an unanimous and threatening voice, 
resolved to return back, but the eternal God 
gave him spirit and valour against them all. 
With these thoughts and the consideration of 
other wonderful favors he had experienced, he 
says he ought not to be in fear of the tempest ; 
but he adds that his apprehensions and the an- 
guish of his mind would not allow him to rest ; 
besides, he continues, his anxiety was increased 
in reflecting upon the state of his two sons whom 
he had left at their studies in Cordova, these 
would be left orphans in a foreign land, and 
the King and Queen being ignorant of the ser- 
vices he had rendered them by the voyage, 
would not feel any inclination to provide for 
them. On this account, and that their High- 
nesses might be informed that our Lord had 
granted success to the enterprise in the discov- 
ery of the Indies, and might know that storms 
did not prevail in those quarters,* (which was 
apparent from the plants and trees growing 

* It was a very fortunate circumstance for Columbus 
that he arrived in the West Indies so late in the year. 
The hurricane season was just past, and had he reached 
there a month sooner, it is probable one of those dreadful 
tempests would have destroyed his whole fleet. 



220 FIRST VOYAGE 

down to the very brink of the sea,) he devised 
a method of acquainting them with the circum- 
stances of the voyage in case they should perish 
in the storm ; this he performed by writing upon 
parchment an account of it, as full as possible, 
and earnestly entreating the finder to carry it to 
the King and Queen of Spain. The parchment 
was rolled up in a waxed cloth, and well tied ; a 
large wooden cask being then produced, he plac- 
ed it within, and threw it into the sea, none of the 
crew knowing what it was, but all taking it for 
some act of devotion. Violent showers of rain 
followed, and the wind shifted to the West, when 
they scudded before it under the foresail five 
hours, with a tremendous sea, going two leagues 
and a half to the NE. The mainsail was taken 
in, lest the sea should carry it away altogether. 
Friday, Feb. 15th. After sunset last night, 
the sky began to grow clear in the West, and the 
wind inclined to that quarter. The bonnet v as 
set upon the mainsail. The sea was high, but 
abating. They steered ENE. four miles an 
hour, and during the night w 7 ent thirteen leagues. 
At sunrise they discovered land ahead, which some 
thought to be Madeira, and others the rock of 
Cintra near Lisbon. The land being about five 
leagues distant, the wind suddenly came round to 
the ENE., directly ahead. According to the 
Admiral's reckoning they were near the Azores^ 



OF COLUMBUS. 221 

and he took this for one of those islands. The 
others were by their calculation near Spain. 

Saturday, Feb. 16th. All night they beat 
against the wind for the land, which was found to 
be an island. They stood to the NE. and NNE. 
till sunrise, when they hove about for the South, 
in quest of the island, which was hidden from 
them by clouds, and discovered another island 
astern, at the distance of eight leagues. From 
sunrise till night they continued beating for the 
island, against a violent wind and heavy sea. At 
the time of saying the salve which is in the be- 
ginning of the night, a light was seen by some of 
the crew to leeward, which appeared to be the 
island first seen yesterday. All night they kept 
plying to windward, to discover, if possible, the 
islands by sunrise. The Admiral took a little 
rest, having since Wednesday, neither slept nor 
been able to do so; he found himself exceeding- 
ly lame from exposure to the cold and waves, 
and the little food which he had taken. They 
steered SSW., and at night espied an island, 
which, by reason of the clouds, they did not re- 
cognise. 

Monday, Feb. 18th. After sunset last night 
they sailed round the island to find an anchor- 
age and communicate with those on shore. An 
anchor was dropped which they quickly lost, and 
were obliged to put to sea again, beating to 



222 FIRST VOYAGE 

windward all night. At sunrise they stood to- 
ward the North part of the island, where ^hey 
once more cast anchor, and sending the boat to 
land, ascertained that it was the island of St. 
Mary, one of the Azores. The inhabitants di- 
rected them to a harbour for the caravel, and 
declared that they had never witnessed a storm 
like that which had endured for fifteen days 
past, and wondered how the Spaniards had es- 
caped. The islanders returned thanks to God, 
and rejoiced much to hear that the Aamiral 
had discovered the Indies. He says that his 
reckoning had been very true, for which he gave 
many thanks to our Lord. And although.it ap- 
parently run a little beyond their true situation, 
yet he had held it for certain that they were 
in the neighborhood of the Azores, one of which 
isles he thought this to be, upon the discovery 
of it. He adds that he suffered his reckoning to 
run ahead of their true progress for the pur- 
pose of humoring the pilots and others who 
made calculations, these having manifested great 
dissatisfaction at finding his accounts differing 
from their own. 

Tuesday, Feb. 19th. After sunset, three men 
came down to the shore and called out to them. 
The boat was sent, and they came on board 
bringing fowls and new bread with other things, 
it being shrove-tide ; these were sent by the 
Captain of the island, who was named Juan de 



OP COLUMBUS. 223 

Castaneda, and stated that he was well acquaint- 
ed with the Admiral, but could not visit him on 
account of the night. He promised to come on 
board in the morning with other refreshments, 
and bring with him the three Spaniards who had 
been sent on shore, and whom as he declared, 
he detained for the great pleasure of hearing 
them relate the particulars of the voyage. The 
Admiral ordered every respect to be shown 
towards the messengers of the Captain, and 
assigned them beds for sleeping on board, as it 
was late and the town distant. And remember- 
ing the vow they had made during the storm, to 
go in penitential garments to the first church 
dedicated to Our Lady, which they should meet 
on coming to land, he directed that one half the 
crew should go and fulfil their vow at a hermit- 
age near the shore, and himself with the other 
half afterwards. Not seeing any thing to fear on 
the land, and confiding in the offers of the Cap- 
tain, and the amity which subsisted between Por- 
tugal and astile, he requested the three island- 
ers to go to the town and send him an ecclesi- 
astic for the purpose of reciting a mass. The 
crew being at the hermitage at their devo- 
tions in accomplishment of the vow, the whole 
population attacked them with horse and foot, 
the Captain at their head, and took them all 
prisoners. Meantime the Admiral continued 



224 FIRST VOYAGE 

waiting without any suspicion, for the return 
of the boat, that he might go with the rest of 
the crew in their turn. About eleven o'clock in 
the forenoon, seeing nothing of his men, he be- 
gan to suspect that the Portuguese had detained 
them, or the boat was wrecked, the shore being 
high and rocky. Nothing could be discovered 
on land, as the hermitage was situated behind a 
point. He ordered the anchor to be weighed, 
and they made sail till they came off against the 
place, when they discovered many persons on 
horseback, who alighted and entering the boat 
with their arms, came off towards the caravel 
for the purpose of capturing the Admiral. The 
captain stood up in the boat and demanded a se- 
curity of the Admiral, who replied that he would 
grant the request, but wished to know why none 
of the Spaniards were in the boat ; he invited 
him on board the caravel, promising to satisfy 
all his demands ; this he did in order to make a 
prisoner of him and recover his crew, but the 
Captain finding he was unlikely to succeed in 
his attempt, did not dare come on board. The 
Admiral seeing that he could not entice him into 
his hands, demanded to be informed, why he 
detained his men, and how they had offend- 
ed the king of Portugal, adding that in the 
dominions of the King and Queen of Castile, the 
Portuguese were treated with every respect and 



OP COLUMBUS. 225 

were as free and safe as at Lisbon. He further 
informed him that his sovereigns had given him 
letters of recommendation to all Princes, Sove- 
reigns and commanders in the world, which he 
was ready to exhibit if desired ; and that he was 
their Admiral of the Sea and Viceroy of the In- 
dies, which then belonged to their Highnesses. 
The commission to this effect, signed and sealed 
by their hands he displayed to the captain who 
remained at a distance. To these representa- 
tions he subjoined others relating to the amity 
which subsisted between the King and Queen of 
Castile and the King of Portugal, and the or- 
ders which had been given by the former to 
treat with respect all Portuguese ships. If 
notwithstanding these considerations, he refus- 
ed to release his crew, he stated that he should 
not be hindered from proceeding to Castile, as he 
had men enough left to navigate his vessel to 
Seville, and the Captain and his followers would 
be severely punished for the injury they had 
done him. HL he Captain and others in the boat 
replied that they knew nothing there of the 
King and Queen of Castile, or their commissions, 
nor cared for them, but would make the Span- 
iards learn what the Portuguese were, expecting 
to intimidate the Admiral. This gave him much 
anxiety, suspecting that some difference had 
arisen between the two kingdoms since his de- 
28 



226 FIRST VOYAGE 

parture, and he could not refrain from answering 
the Captain in such a manner as his conduct mer- 
ited. The Captain stood up again in the boat 
and ordered him to proceed with the caravel 
to the harbour, adding that all he had done was 
by order of the king, his master. The Admiral 
ordered all on board his vessel to bear witness 
to these transactions, and called out to the Cap- 
tain and those with him, vowing that he would 
not leave the caravel till he had carried a hun- 
dred of the Portuguese to Castile, and depopu- 
lated the island. He then returned to his an- 
chorage in the harbour, as the wind and weather 
did not admit of taking any other course. 

Wednesday, Feb. 20th. The Admiral ordered 
the vessel to be set in order, and the casks to be 
filled from the sea for ballast, as the harbour 
was very bad, and he feared the rocky bottom 
would cut the cables, which in fact happened, 
and they put to sea toward the island of St. Mi- 
chael. There was no harbour in all the Azores, 
which was safe from the weather which then 
prevailed, and the only remedy was to stand off 
to sea. 

Thursday, Feb. 21st. They left the island of 
St. Mary last night for that of St. Michael, in 
search of a harbour against the bad weather, the 
wind being high with a heavy sea. They sailed 
all night without seeing any land, by reason of the 



OF COLUMBUS. 227 

clouds, and the obscurity which the wind and sea 
caused. The Admiral says, he was under some 
concern, having but three experienced sailors on 
board, the remainder being ignorant of maritime 
affairs. They kept lying to with much labour 
and danger from the violence of the storm. In 
one respect Our Lord showed his mercy, the sea 
and wind came in one direction, had they been 
cross, the damage suffered would have been 
much greater. At sunrise, not seeing the island 
of St. Michael, the Admiral resolved to return 
to St. Mary's, and attempt the recovery of his 
crew, with the boat and anchors which had been 
lost. 

He expresses his astonishment at the furious 
storms among these islands, having sailed in the 
Indies all the winter without being forced to 
anchor by the weather, and not having for a single 
hour witnessed the sea unfit to navigate. He 
remarks that he met with stormy weather upon 
the passage outward till his arrival at the Ca- 
naries, but after that, had always a smooth sea 
and fine wind. He draws the conclusion that 
the theologians and learned philosophers had 
very justly placed the terrestrial paradise at the 
extremity of the East, the climate there being 
exceedingly mild. This is the region, he says, 
that he has discovered. 



228 FIRST VOYAGE 

Friday, Feb. 22d. Yesterday they anchored 
at the island of St. Mary, in the place they had 
o3cupied before, and presently a man came clam- 
bering down the rocky shore opposite them, and 
called out for them not to leave the place. 
Shortly after, came the boat with five sailors, 
two ecclesiastics, and a notary. They demanded 
a security, which being given by the Admiral, 
they came on board, and it being night slept 
there, he showing them every respect in his 
power. In the morning they requested to see 
his commissions from the King and Queen ol Cas- 
tile, that they might be satisfied he had made the 
voyage by their order. The Admiral was sen- 
sible that they did this by way of a colour for 
their previous conduct, wishing to get free from 
the affair as well as they could, having failed in 
the attempt to seize him. It appeared that 
they were apprehensive he would carry his 
threat into effect. The Admiral in order to 
regain his men, thought fit to show them the 
King and Queen's letters, and his other commis- 
sions, he then treated them with such things as he 
had, and dismissed them contented ashore. The 
crew in the island were then released, and came 
on board in the boat ; from them the Admiral 
learned that had the Portuguese succeeded in 
taking him, he would never have got free, for 
as the Captain stated, the King his master had 
o-iven orders to that effect. 



OF COLUMBUS, 229 

Saturday, Feb. 23d. Yesterday the weather 
began to grow favourable ; they weighed an- 
chor, and sailed round the island, searching for 
a good anchorage, to take in wood, and stone for 
ballast. Could not succeed till evening. 

Sunday, Feb. 24th. Came to anchor last eve- 
ning, but the sea being high, the boat was not 
able to land. At the first watch of the night, 
the wind began to blow from the W. and SW. 
and the Admiral ordered the sails to be set; 
as it was dangerous in those islands to lie at an- 
chor with a Southerly wind, and from the SW. 
it quickly shifts to S. Seeing that it blew fa- 
vorably for the passage to Castile, he resolved 
not to wait for the wood and ballast, and ordered 
to steer to the E., in which direction they sailed 
till sunrise, for the space of six hours and a half, 
seven miles an hour, going forty-five miles and a 
half. From sunrise till sunset they sailed six 
miles an hour, going sixty-six miles, in all twenty- 
eight leagues. 

Monday, Feb. 25th. After sunset last night 
they kept on their course E., five miles an hour 
till sunset, sailing sixty-five miles or sixteen 
leagues and a quarter. From thence till sunrise 
the next morning, sixteen leagues and a half, the 
sea smooth, thanks to God. There came to the 
vessel a very large bird like an eagle. 

Tuesday, Feb. 26th. Continued their course 



230 FIRST VOYAGE 

E., after sunset, the sea smooth, thanks to God. 
For the most of the night sailed eight miles an 
hour, going a hundred miles, or twenty-five 
leagues. After sunrise the wind grew light with 
showers. Went about eight leagues to the ENE. 

Wednesday, Feb. 27th. Last night and all 
this day they were driven out of their course 
by the contrary wind and heavy sea. The Ad- 
miral found himself by his reckoning, one hun- 
dred and twenty-five leagues from Cape St. Vin- 
cent, eighty from the island of Madeira, and one 
hundred and six from that of St. Mary. He 
was much afflicted at meeting with such a storm 
so near home. 

Thursday, Feb. 28th. Kept on in the same 
manner through the night, the wind varying 
from S. to SE. and NE. the same through the 
day. 

Friday, March 1st. In the night sailed E. by 
N., twelve leagues ; in the day, twenty-three 
leagues and a half in the same direction. 

Saturday, March 2d. At night kept on their 
course E. by N., sailing twenty-eight leagues ; by 
day, twenty more. 

Sunday, March 3d. After sunset continued 
their course E. A violent squall struck the 
vessel and split all the sails. They were in im- 
minent danger, but God saw fit to deliver them. 
A lot was ordered for the choice of one to go on 
a pilgrimage in penitential garments to St. Mary 



OF COLUMBUS. 231 

de la Cinta, in Huelba, and the lot fell again upon 
the Admiral. They all made a vow to fast upon 
bread and water the first Saturday after their 
arrival. Sixty miles had been sailed before the 
sails were split, afterwards they drove under 
bare poles, with a furious tempest and cross sea. 
Signs of land were seen, and all judged them- 
selves near Lisbon. 

Monday, March 4th. In the night they la- 
boured with a terrible storm, and were near 
meeting with destruction from the cross sea, the 
fury of the wind, which seemed to carry them 
up to the skies, and the violent showers 
and lightning from many parts, but it pleased 
our Lord to sustain them, and they drove before 
the storm till the first watch, when the sailors 
discovered land, and in order not to approach 
too near it before discovering a harbour or place 
of shelter, they set the foresail and stood off to 
sea, although with great danger, but there was 
no other course. God preserved them till day, 
but as the Admiral says, with infinite labour and 
apprehension on their part. When the day ar- 
rived they found the land to be the Rock of 
Cintra, near Lisbon, where the Admiral deter- 
mined to enter, as he could do no better, the 
violence of the storm not allowing him to remain 
at Cascaes,near the mouth of the river. He 
states that the people of the town were all the 



232 FIRST VOYAGE 

morning offering up prayers for the safety of the 
vessel, and upon her arrival within the river ran 
in crowds to see the Spaniards, wondering at 
their escape. At three o'clock they arrived at 
Rastelo upon the Tagus, and were informed by 
the mariners of the place that such a stormy 
winter had never been known, twenty-five ships 
being lost in Flanders, and others had been de- 
tained four months without being able to put to 
sea. The Admiral immediately wrote to the 
King of Portugal, who was nine leagues from 
that place, and informed him that the King and 
Queen of Castile had directed him to enter the 
ports of his Highness to purchase necessaries, 
and that he had come not from Guinea, but the 
Indies. He requested permission for the cara- 
vel to proceed to Lisbon, by reason that some 
avaricious persons, imagining that the vessel con- 
tained much gold, might in that lonely place at- 
tempt some deed of violence. 

Tuesday, March 5th. This day Bartolome 
Diaz de Lisboa the Patron of the principal Por- 
tuguese ship which lay at anchor at Rastelo, 
came in an armed boat to the caravel, and signi- 
fied to the Admiral that he must go with them 
and give an account of himself to the stewards of 
the king, and the Captain of the abovementioned 
ship; he replied that he was Admiral of the 
King and Queen of Castile, and gave no accounts 



OF COLUMBUS. 



233 



to any such persons, adding that he should not 
leave his vessel except by force of arms. The 
Patron then said he might send the master of 
the caravel, to which the Admiral answered that 
neither the master nor any other person should 
go unless compelled by violence, for he looked 
upon it to be the same as going himself, and it 
was the custom of the Castilian Admirals rather 
to die than deliver up either themselves or their 
men. The Patron then grew moderate and said 
he might do as he pleased, seeing he held such 
a resolution, but requested to see the letters of 
the King and Queen of Castile, which the Admi- 
ral thought best to show him, when he returned 
to the ship, and related the circumstance to the 
Captain, whose name was Alvaro Da ma. The 
captain came on board the Admiral in great 
pomp with drums, trumpets and pipes, oifering to 
serve him in any way he desired. 

Wednesday, March 6th. The news of the 
Admiral's arrival from the Indies being known at 
Lisbon, there came a vast multitude from the city 
to visit him, and see the Indians ; it was a matter 
of admiration to behold the crowds, and the 
wonder which they manifested, giving thanks to 
Our Lord, and declaring that for the great faith, 
and desire to serve God which the King and 
Queen of Castile displayed, the Almighty had 
granted them all this. 
29 



234 FIRST VOYAGE 

Thursday, March 7th. This day came an in- 
finite multitude of people to the caravel, and 
among them many knights, and the two royal 
stewards ; all gave unbounded thanks to our 
Lord for the great profit and increase of Christi- 
anity thus secured to the Sovereigns of Castile, 
which they attributed to the zeal of these Princ- 
es for the advancement of the christian religion. 

Friday, March 8th. This day the Admiral 
received by the hands of Martin de Noronha, a 
letter from the King of Portugal, requesting him 
to pay him a visit, as the weather did not permit 
him to sail : The Admiral thought proper to 
comply, in order not to show mistrust, although 
he disliked it. He set out upon the journey and 
slept at Sacanben. The King ordered his stew- 
ards to furnish him and his crew with every 
thing they stood in need of, free of cost, and to 
perform every wish of the Admiral. 

Saturday, March 9th. He left Sacanben to 
meet the king, who was at Val do Paraiso, nine 
leagues from Lisbon ; he did not reach the place 
till night on account of the rain. The king caus- 
ed him to be received in the most honorable 
manner by the principal persons of his house- 
hold, and conducted into his presence, where he 
treated him with the greatest respect, causing 
him to be seated. He then entered into con- 
versation with him, and offered to perform every 
thin 0, which coukl be for his service or that of 



OF COLUMBUS. 235 

the King and Queen of Castile. He expressed 
the highest pleasure at the success of the voyage? 
but remarked that he understood, according to 
the capitulation between him and those sove- 
reigns, that this acquisition belonged to him. The 
Admiral replied that he had not seen the capitu- 
lation, nor was acquainted with any other cir- 
cumstance respecting the matter, except that his 
orders had been not to go to the mine, nor to 
any part of Guinea, and that this had been pub- 
lished in all the ports of Andalusia before the 
voyage. The King graciously answered that he 
was certain no vouchers for that fact were ne- 
necessary. He ordered the Prior of Crato to 
entertain him,who was the person of the highest 
distinction in the place. This man treated him 
with every honour and attention. 

Sunday, March 10th. After mass, the King 
repeated to him that he would furnish him with 
any thing he desired. Much arguing arose 
between them about the voyage; the king al- 
ways desiring him to be seated and doing him 
much honour.* 

Monday, March 1 lib. The Admiral took 
leave of the King, who entrusted him with a 
message to the King and Queen of Castile ; and 
dismissed him with many marks of affection. He 

* See Note III. 



236 FIRST VOYAGE 

set out after dinner, attended by Don Martin 
de Noronha, and all the knights, who by the 
King's direction escorted him some distance. 
Arriving at a monastery of St. Anthony near 
Villafranca, where the Queen resided, he went 
to pay his respects and kiss her hands, she hav- 
ing requested him not to depart without paying 
her a visit. She received him very honorably 
in presence of the Duke and Marquis. He left 
her at night, and went to sleep at Llandra. 

Tuesday, March 12th. On the point of set- 
ting out from Llandra, there arrived a gentle- 
man from the King, informing him that if he 
wished to go to Castile by land, he was ready to 
attend him for the purpose of providing convey- 
ances and lodgings upon the road, and any other 
thing which might be necessary. When the 
Admiral took leave of him, he ordered him a 
mule, and another for the pilot, to whom as the 
Admiral learnt, he also presented twenty cspa- 
dims* He mentions this, as he says, that the 
King and Queen might know it. He arrived 
on board the caravel at night. 

Wednesday, March 13th. At eight o'clock, 
weighed anchor and put to sea for Seville, with 
a Northwest wind and heavy sea. 

Thursday, March 14th. After sunset last 

* Gold coin. 



OF COLUMBUS. 237 

night, steered South, and before morning found 
themselves off Cape St. Vincent. They then 
stood to the East for Salles, and sailed with a 
light wind till night, when they were off Furon. 
Friday, March 15th. After sunset continued 
their course with little wind, and at sunrise found 
themselves offSaltes. At noon they crossed the 
bar with the flood tide, and arrived within the 
port, from whence they had sailed on the third 
of August, the preceeding year. And here, the 
Admiral says, this relation ends, but that he pur- 
poses to go to Barcelona by sea, being informed 
that their Highnesses are in that city, there to 
give them an account of his voyage, in which 
our Lord had directed and enlightened him. 
For although he believed without scruple that 
the Almighty created all things good, that all is 
excellent but sin, and that nothing can be done 
without his permission, 'yet' he observes,' it has 
been most wonderfully manifested in the circum- 
stances of this voyage, as may be seen by consid- 
ering the many signal miracles performed through- 
out, as well as the fortune which has attended my- 
self, who passed so long a time at the court of vour 
Highnesses, and met with the opposition of so 
many of the principal persons of your household, 
who were all against me, and ridiculed my pro- 
ject. The which I hope in Our Lord will prove 



238 FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. 

the greatest honour to Christianity ever accom- 
plished with such ease.' These are the final 
words of the Admiral Don Christopher Colum- 
bus, in the relation of his first voyage and dis- 
covery of the Indies. 



LETTER 



COLUMBUS TO RAFAEL SANCHEZ. 



The following summary account of the voy- 
age was written by our navigator on his arrival 
at Lisbon. It was translated into semi-barbarous 
Latin by Leandro Cosco and published at Rome 
in 1493. It appears to have been reprinted, 
but the work is rarely to be met with, and the 
copies very imperfect. According to the state- 
ment of Munoz, the greater part of the original 
text has been preserved in an unpublished his- 
tory of the Catholic Kings written by Andreo 
Bernaldez the Court Chaplain. Don Francisco 
Antonio Gonzalez the royal Librarian has col- 
lated the different copies of this work, and trans- 
lated it into Spanish for the collection of Navar- 
rete. It is subjoined here with the title prefixed 
to the first edition. 



240 FIRST VOYAGE 

Letter 'of Christopher Columbus, the great Benefactor of the 
present age, concerning the newly discovered islands of India 
upon the Ganges, upon which enterprise he was despatched eight 
months since by the invincible Sovereigns of Spain, Ferdinand 
and Isabela ; directed to Don Ilafael Sanchez, Treasurer of 
their most Serene Highnesses. Translated from the Spanish 
into Latin by Leandro de Cosco, April 25th, 1493, first year 
of the pontificate of Alexander VI. 

As I know you will take pleasure in hearing 
of the success of my undertaking, I have deter- 
mined to send you an account of the occurrences 
of my voyage and discoveries. Thirty-three 
days after my departure from Cadiz I arrived in 
the sea of India, where I discovered many islands, 
inhabited by innumerable people. Of these I 
took possession in the name of our fortunate 
monarch, with public proclamation and colors 
flying, no one offering any resistance. I named 
the first of these islands San Salvador, thus be- 
stowing upon it the name of our holy Saviour, 
under whose protection I made the discovery. 
The indians call it Guanahanyn. I gave also 
a new name to the others, calling the second 
Santa Maria de la Conception, the third, Fernan- 
dina, the fourth Isabela, the fifth Juana. In the 
same manner I named the rest. Arriving- at the 
one last mentioned, I sailed along its coast, tow- 
ard the West, discovering so great an extent of 
land that I could not imagine it to be an island 



OF COLUMBUS. 241 

but the continent of Cathay. I did not however 
discover upon the coast any large cities, all we 
saw being a few villages and farms, with the in- 
habitants of which we could not obtain any com- 
munication, they all flying at our approach. 1 
continued my course, still expecting to meet with 
some town or city, but after having gone a great 
distance, and not meeting with any, and finding 
myself proceeding towards the North, which I 
was desirous to avoid on account of the cold, and 
moreover meeting with a contrary wind, I de- 
termined to return to the South, and therefore 
put about and sailed back to a harbour which I 
had before observed. 

At this place I sent two men into the country 
to see if the King or any cities were to be found. 
These returned in three days, having discovered 
a great number of the towns, but all of them 
small, and without any government. In the mean 
time I had learned from certain indians whom I 
had taken here, that this country was an island. 
I returned along the coast to the East, a distance 
of three hundred and twenty-two miles, which 
brought me to the extremity of the island. 
Here I discovered to the East, another island, 
fifty-four miles from Juana. I gave it the name 
of Espanola, and coasted along the island to the 
30 



242 FIRST VOYAGE 

North as at Juana I had proceeded to the East,* 
a distance of five hundred and sixty-four miles/]" 
All these islands are very fertile. That of Juana 
abounds in safe and capacious harbours, which sur- 
pass in excellence all 1 have everseen elsewhere. 
It is watered by a great number of large and 
pleasant rivers, and contains many high moun- 
tains. 

These islands are of a beautiful appearance 
and present a great diversity of views. They 
may be traversed in any part, and are adorned 
with a great variety of exceedingly lofty trees, 
which to appearance never lose their foliage, for 
I saw them as verdant and flourishing as they 
exist in Spain in the month of May, some covered 
with flowers, others loaded with fruit, accoidmg 
to their different species and their season of bear- 
ing, the whole offering a spectacle of great beau- 
ty. The nightingale and countless other birds 
were singing, although it was the month of No- 
vember when 1 visited this delightful region. 
There are in the island of Juana six or eight 
sorts of palm trees, superior to those of our land 

* Both the Latin and Spanish copies offer this state- 
ment, but it is evident that the words North and East should 
interchange their situations in the text. 

f The course sailed by Columbus along both the islands 
is about equal to this extent. 



OF COLUMBUS. 243 

in height and beauty, and this superiority is like- 
wise observable in the other trees as well as in 
the herbs and fruits. Here are to be seen the 
most beautiful pine trees, and the most exten- 
sive fields and pastures, a great variety of birds, 
several sorts of honey, and many kinds of metal, 
with the exception of iron. In the island named 
Espanola, there are lofty and beautiful mountains, 
large cultivated tracts, woods, fertile fields, and 
every thing adapted to the purposes of agricul- 
ture, the pasturage of cattle, and the erection of 
houses. The' excellence of the harbours here, 
and the abundance of the streams which contri- 
bute to the salubrity of the climate, exceed im- 
agination. There is a considerable difference 
between the trees, fruits and fields of this island 
and those of Juana, but here are found divers 
sorts of precious drugs, gold and metals. The 
inhabitants of both sexes, in Espanola and all the 
other islands which 1 saw or heard of, go naked 
as they were born, all except a few females who 
wear at the waist a green leaf, a portion of cot- 
ton, or bit of silk which they manufacture for 
this purpose. 

As 1 before remarked, they possess no iron, and 
they neither use nor are acquainted with wea- 
pons, to the exercise of which indeed they are 
not at all adapted, not by reason of anv corporal 



244 FIRST VOYAGE 

deficiency, as they are very well shaped, but on 
account of their great timidity. Instead of arms 
they have canes dried in the sun, to the largest 
ends of which they fix a piece of wood sharpened 
at the end ; of these however, they have not 
the courage to make much use. I have in many 
instances sent two or three of my men to their 
towns to communicate with the inhabitants, when 
the indians would tumultuously rush out, and see- 
ing our people drawing near, run away with such 
haste that the father would abandon his child, 
and the child his father. This timidity was not 
owing to any violence or injury we offered them, 
as I was in the practice of making presents of cloth 
and other things to all the natives whom 1 met, 
but arose from their natural mildness and want 
of courage. Notwithstanding this, as soon as 
they have thrown aside their fear, and consider 
themselves in safety, they are very ingenuous 
and honest, and display great liberality with 
whatever they possess. 

They never refuse to give any thing away 
which is demanded of them, and will e.en them- 
selves entreat an acceptance of their property. 
They exhibit a great friendship towards every 
one, and will give whatever they have for a tri- 
fle or nothing at all. 1 forbade my men to pur- 
chase any thing of them with such worthless ar- 
ticles as bits of earthenware, fragments of plat- 



OP COLUMBUS. 245 

ters, broken glass, nails, and thongs of leather, al- 
though when they got possession of any such 
thing they valued it as highly as the most preci- 
ous jewel in the world. In this manner of bar- 
tering, a sailor has acquired for a leather strap 
or piece of rope, gold to the amount of three 
sueldos. Others have obtained as much for a 
matter of still lower value. For new Spanish 
coins they would give any thing asked of them, 
as an ounce and a half or two ounces of gold, or 
thirty or forty pounds of cotton. Thus they would 
trade away their cotton and gold like idiots, for 
broken hoops, platters and glass. I prohibited 
their traffic on account of its injustice, and made 
them many presents of useful things which 1 had 
carried with me, for the purpose of gaining their 
affection, in order that they may receive the 
faith of Jesus Christ, be well disposed towards 
us, and inclined to submit to the King and Queen 
our Princes, and all the Spaniards, and further- 
more that they may furnish us with the commod- 
ities which abound among them and we are in 
want of. 

They are not idolators, but believe that all 
power and goodness is in heaven, and that 1 had 
proceeded from that place with my ships and 
men ; under this notion they received me at my 
first arrival as soon as they had banished their 



246 FIRST VOYAGE 

fear. They are not stupid and indolent, but 
acute and sagacious. Those of them who nav- 
igate the seas among those islands, give singular 
accounts of what thej have observed upon 
their voyages, but have never seen people 
who wear clothes, nor any ships similar to ours. 
On my arrival 1 took by force from the first 
island, a few of the indians, in order that we 
might become acquainted with one another's 
language, and to gain a knowledge of what their 
country contained. These were of singular use 
to us, as we came to understand each other in a 
short time by the help of words and signs. I 
have them still with me, and they continue in 
the belief that we have come from heaven. 
This information they published wherever we 
arrived, exclaiming in a loud voice, 'Come! 
Come! and see the celestial people.' Upon this 
call, the natives would come thronging to us, 
after having banished the fear which seized 
them at first, men women and children, old and 
young, crowding the roads and bringing us vic- 
tuals and drink, with the utmost affection and 
reverence. 

In every one of these islands there are a great 
number of canoes, each one made of a solid log, of 
a nairow shape, somewhat resembling our fustas, 



OF COLUMBUS. 247 

but swifter in the water ; they are navigated 
solely by oars. They are of different sizes, the 
most of them containing seats for eighteen rowers. 
With these they carry on a commerce among 
these islands which are innumerable. I saw some 
of these canoes with seventy or eighty rowers. 
Throughout these islands there is no diversity 
in the appearance of the people, their manners 
or language, all the inhabitants understanding 
one another, a very favorable circumstance in 
my opinion, to the design which I have no doubt 
is entertained by our king, namely to convert 
them to the holy christian faith, to which as far 
as I can perceive they are well disposed. I 
have said that I sailed from W. toE. three hun- 
dred and twenty two miles along the island of 
Juana ; from the length of this course I am con- 
fident that this island is larger than England and 
Scotland together, for besides the extent which 
I coasted there are two other provinces to the 
West which 1 did not survey. One of these is 
named by the indians Anam, and contains inhab- 
itants with tails. These tracts extend to the 
distance of a hundred and eighty miles, as I have 
learnt from the indians with me, who are well 
acquainted with them. 

The island of Espanola is as large as that part 
of Spain which extends from Catalonia to Fon- 



248 FIRST VOYAGE 

tarabia, which I infer from the extent of that 
side of it which I sailed along, being five hun- 
dred and forty miles in length. I took possess- 
ion of this fine island, as I had done of the others, 
in the name of our invincible king ; and fixed upon 
a spot for a large city here, as 1 judged it the 
most favorable place. I called it Navidad, and 
ordered the construction of a fortress here, 
which is by this time finished. At this place I 
left a sufficient number of men, with all sorts of 
arms, and a sufficiency of provisions for above a 
year. I also left them a caravel and expert 
workmen, after having secured them the friend- 
ship of the king of this part of the country. 
These people are a friendly and amiable race, 
and the king took a pride in calling himself my 
brother. Even if their sentiments should change, 
and they should become hostile towards us, they 
will not be able to effect any injury to those who 
remain at the fortress, as they are destitute of 
weapons, go naked, and are very cowardly : so 
that those whom I have left there will be able 
to retain the whole island in subjection without 
any danger, if they adhere to the regulations 
with which I charged them. 

Each of the natives, as far as I can under- 
stand, has one wife, with the exception of the 
King and Princes, who are permitted to have as 



OF COLUMBUS. 249 

many as twenty. The women appear to do 
more labour than the men. Whether there ex- 
ists any such thing here as private property I have 
not been able to ascertain, as I have observed 
that an individual has been set to distribute to 
the others, in particular, food and such things. I 
found no ferocious sanguinary people in these 
parts, as some seem to have imagined the peo- 
ple here to be, but they are a very mild and 
friendly race. Their colour is not black like 
that of the Ethiopians. Their hair is lank and 
and hanging down. They do not inhabit those 
parts where the sun's rays are very powerful, 
as the heat is excessive here, the latitude being 
apparently twenty-six degrees. On the summits 
of the mountains the cold is great, but they do 
not suffer any incommodity from it, by being ac- 
customed to the climate, and by the use of hot 
meats and drinks which they consume very pro- 
digally. 

People of a monstrous description I saw none 
nor heard of any, except those of the island 
named Caris which is the second on the course 
from Espanola to India : this island is ; nhabited 
by people who are regarded by their neighbours 
as exceedingly ferocious ; they feed upon human 
flesh. These people have many sorts of canoes 
with which they make incursions upon all the 
31 



250 FIRST VOYAGE 

isles of India, robbing and plundering wherever 
they go. Their difference from the others con- 
sists in their wearing long hair like that of the 
women, and in using bows and arrows of cane, 
these last constructed as I have already related* 
by fixing a piece of sharpened wood at the larger 
end. On this account they are deemed very 
ferocious by the other indians, and are much 
feared by them ; I think however, these men are 
precisely like the others. These are the na- 
tives who go to visit the females who are *he 
sole inhabitants of the island of Matenin, which 
is the first on the route from Espanola to India. 
These women exercise none of the common oc- 
cupations of their sex, but manage the bow and 
dart, as we are told of the ancients. They wear 
armour made of plates of copper, of which metal 
they have great abundance. 

I am assured by the indians that there is 
another island, larger than Espanola, whose in- 
habitants are without hair, and who possess a 
greater quantity of gold than the others. From 
this island, as well as the others, I have taken 
some of the inhabitants to confirm the accounts 
which I give. 

Finally to sum up the whole, and state briefly 
the great profits of this voyage, I am enabled to 
promise the acquisition, by a trifling assistance 



OP COLUMBUS. 251 

from their majesties, of any quantity of gold, 
drugs, cotton, and mastick, which last article is 
found only in the island of Scio ; also any quanti- 
ty of aloe, and as many slaves for the service of 
the marine, as their Majesties may stand in need 
of. The same may be said of rhubarb and a 
great variety of other things which I have no 
doubt will be discovered by those I have left at 
the fort, as I did not stop long at any single 
place, unless obliged to do so by the weather, 
with the exception of the city of Navidad where 
we made some stay to build the fort and provide 
the necessary securities for the place. 

Although the discoveries actually accom- 
plished appear great and surprising, yet I should 
have effected much more had I been furnish- 
ed with a proper fleet. Nevertheless the great 
success of this enterprise is not to be ascrib- 
ed to my own merits, but to the holy Catholic 
faith and the piety of our Sovereigns, the 
Lord often granting to men what they never 
imagine themselves capable of effecting, as 
he is accustomed to hear the prayers of his ser- 
vants and those who love his commandments, 
even in that which appears impossible; in this 
manner has it happened to me who have suc- 
ceeded in an undertaking never before accom- 
plished by man. For although some persons 
have written or spoken of the existence of these 



,.' 



252 FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS. 

islands, they have all rested their assertions upon 
conjecture, no one having ever affirmed that he 
saw them, on which account their existence has 
been deemed iabulous. 

And now ought the King, Queen, Princes, 
and all their dominions, as well as the whole of 
Christendom, to give thanks to our Saviour 
Jesus Christ who has granted us such a vic- 
tory and great success. Let processions be or- 
dered, let solemn festivals be celebrated, let the 
temples be filled with boughs and flowers. Let 
Christ rejoice upon earth as he does in heaven, 
to witness the coming salvation of so many peo- 
ple, heretofore given over to perdition. Let us 
rejoice for the exaltation of our faith, as well as 
for the augmentation of our temporal prosperity, 
in which not only Spain but all Christendom shall 
participate. — Such are the events which I have 
described to you with brevity. Adieu. 

Lisbon, March 14th. 

CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS, 

Admiral of iht Armada of the Ocean, 



LETTER OF COLUMBUS 

TO 

LUIS DE SANTANGEL, 

Comptroller of the Treasury of the King and Queen, 
giving a summary relation of the voyage.* 

Senor, 

Knowing the pleasure you will re- 
ceive in hearing of the great victory which Our 
Lord has granted me in my voyage, I hasten to 
inform you, that after a passage of seventy-one 
days, I arrived at the Indies, with the fleet 
which the most illustrious King and Queen our 
sovereigns committed to my charge, where I 
discovered many islands inhabited by people 
without number, and of which I took possession 
for their Highnesses by proclamation with the 
royal banner displayed, no one offering any con- 
tradiction. The first which I discovered, 1 
named San Salvador, in commemoration of our 
Holy Saviour, who has, in a wonderful manner, 
granted all our success. The indians call it 
Guanahani. To the second, I gave the name of 
Santa Maria de Conception, to the third, that of 
Fernandina, to the fourth, that of Isabela, to the 

* Found in the archives of Simancas 



254 



FIRST VOYAGE 



fifth, that of Juana, thus giving each island a new 
name. 1 coasted along the island of Juana to the 
West, and found it of such extent, that I took it 
for a continent, and imagined it must be the 
country of Cathay. Villages were seen near the 
sea-coast, but as 1 discovered no large cities, and 
could not obtain any communication with the in- 
habitants, who all fled at our approach, I con- 
tinued on West, thinking I should not fail in the 
end, to meet with great towns and cities, but 
having gone many leagues without such success, 
and finding that the coast carried me to the N v 
whither I disliked to proceed, on account of the 
impending winter, I resolved to return to the 
S., and accordingly put about, and arrived at an 
excellent harbour in the island, where I dispatch- 
ed two men into the country to ascertain whe- 
ther the King, or any large cities were in the 
neighborhood. They travelled three days, and 
met with innumerable settlements of the natives, 
of a small size, but did not succeed in finding any 
sovereign of the territory, and so returned. I 
made out to learn from some indians which I 
had before taken, that this was an island, and 
proceeded along the coast to the East, an hundred 
and seven leagues, till I reached the extremity. 
I then discovered another island, E. of this, eigh- 
teen leagues distant, which I named Espanola, 
and followed its northern coast, as I did that of 



OF COLUMBUS. 255 

Juana, for the space of an hundred and seventy- 
eight leagues to the E. All these countries are 
of surpassing excellence, and in particular Juana, 
which contains abundance of fine harbours, ex- 
celling any in Christendom, as also many large and 
beautiful rivers. The land is high and exhibits 
chains of tall mountains which seem to reach to 
the skies, and surpass beyond comparison the isle 
of Cetrefrey. These display themselves in all 
manner of beautiful shapes. They are accessi- 
ble in every part, and covered with a vast va- 
riety of lofty trees, which it appears to me, 
never lose their foliage, as we found them fair 
and verdant as in May in Spain. Some were 
covered with blossoms, some with fruit, and 
others in different stages, according to their na- 
ture. The nightingale and a thousand other 
sorts of birds were singing in the month of No- 
vember wherever I went. There are palm- 
trees in these countries, of six or eight sorts, 
which are surprising to see, on account of their 
diversity from ours, but indeed, this is the case 
with respect to the other trees, as well as the 
fruits and weeds. Beautiful forests of pines are 
likewise found, and fields of vast extent. Here 
is also honey, and fruits of a thousand sorts, and 
birds of every variety. The lands contain mines 
of metals, and inhabitants without number. The 
island of Espanola is pre-eminent in beauty and 



256 FIRST VOYAGE 

excellence, offering to the sight the most en- 
chanting view of mountains, plains, rich fields for 
cultivation, and pastures for flocks of all sorts, 
with situations for towns and settlements. Its 
harbours are of such excellence, that their de- 
scription would not gain belief, and the like may 
be said of its abundance of large and fine rivers, 
the most of which abound in gold. The trees, 
fruits and plants of this island differ considerably 
from those of Juana, and the place contains a 
great deal of spicery and extensive mines of gold 
and other metals. The people of this island, 
and of all the others which I have become ac- 
quainted with, go naked as they were born, al- 
though some of the women wear at the loins, a 
leaf, or bit of cotton cloth which they prepare 
for that purpose. They do not possess iron, 
steel, or weapons, and seem to have no inclination 
for the latter, being timorous to the last degree. 
They have an instrument consisting of a cane, 
taken while in seed, and headed with a sharp stick, 
but they never venture to use it. Many times I 
have sent two or three men to one of their vil- 
lages, when whole multitudes have taken to flight 
at the sight of them, and this was not by reason 
of any injury we ever wrought them, for at 
every place where 1 have made any stay, and 
obtained communication with them, I have made 
them presents of cloth and such other things as 



OF COLUMBUS. 257 

I possessed, without demanding any thing in re- 
turn. After they have shaken off their fear of 
us, they display a frankness and liberality in 
their behaviour which no one would believe 
without witnessing it. No request of anything 
from them is ever refused, but they rather invite 
acceptance of what they possess, and manifest 
such a generosity that they would give away 
their own hearts. Let the article be of great or 
small value, they offer it readily, and receive 
anything which is tendered in return with per- 
fect content. I forbade my men to purchase 
their goods with such worthless things as bits of 
platters and broken glass, or thongs of leather, 
although when they got possession of one of 
these, they estimated it as highly as the greatest 
jewel in the world. The sailors would buy of 
them for a scrap of leather, pieces of gold, 
weighing two castdlanos and a half, and even 
more of this metal for something still less in 
value. The whole of an indian's property 
might be purchased of him for a few blancas, 
this would amount to two or three castellanos' 
value of gold, or the same of cotton thread. 
Even the pieces of broken hoops from the casks 
they would receive in barter for their ar- 
ticles, with the greatest simplicity. I thought 
such traffic unjust, and therefore forbade it. I 
presented them with a variety of things, in or- 
32 



258 FIRST VOYAGE 

der to secure their affection, and that they may 
become christians, and enter into the service of 
their Highnesses and the Castilian nation, and 
also aid us in procuring such things as they pos- 
sess, and we stand in need of. They are not 
idolators, nor have they any sort of religion, ex- 
cept believing that power and goodness are in 
heaven, from which place, they entertained a 
firm persuasion that I had come with my ships 
and men. On this account, wherever we met 
them, they showed us the greatest reverence 
after they had overcome their fear. Such con- 
duct cannot be ascribed to their want of under- 
standing, for they are a people of much ingenui- 
ty, and navigate all those seas, giving a remarka- 
bly good account of every part, but do not state 
that they have met with people in clothes, or 
ships like ours. On my arrival at the Indies I 
took by force from the first island I came to, a 
few of the inhabitants, in order that they might 
learn our language and assist us in our discove- 
ries. We succeeded ere long, in understanding 
one another, by signs and words, and 1 have 
them now with me, still thinking we have come 
from heaven, as I learn by much conversation 
which I have had with them. This, they were 
the first to proclaim wherever we went, and the 
other natives would run from house to house, 
and from village to village, crying out i come and 



OP COLUMBUS. ^59 

see the men from heaven] so that all the inhabi- 
tants, both men and women, having gathered 
confidence, hastened towards us, bringing victuals 
and drink, which they presented to us with a 
surprising good will. In all the islands they pos- 
sess a vast number of canoes, which are of va- 
rious sizes, each one constructed of a single log, 
and shaped like a fusta. Some of these are as 
large as & fusta of eighteen oars, although nar- 
row, on account of the material. I have seen 
sixty or eighty men in one of these canoes, and 
each man with his paddle. They are rowed 
with a swiftness which no boat can equal, and 
serve the purpose of transporting goods among 
these innumerable islands. I did not observe 
any great diversity in the appearance of the in- 
habitants in the different parts of these coun- 
tries, nor in their customs nor language, for sin- 
gularly enough in this last respect, they all un- 
derstand one another; on which account I hope 
their Highnesses will exert themselves for the 
conversion of these people to our holy faith, in 
which undertaking they will be found very 
tractable. I have already related that I pro- 
ceeded along the coast of Juana, for an hundred 
and seven leagues from W. to E., from which, I 
dare affirm this island to be larger than England 
and Scotland together; for besides the extent of 
it which I coasted, there are two unexplored 



260 FIRST VOYAGE 

provinces to the W., in one of which, called 
Cibaa, are people with tails. These districts 
cannot be less than fifty or sixty leagues in ex- 
tent, according as I learn from my indians, who 
are acquainted with all these islands. The other 
island, called Espanola, is more extensive than 
the division of Spain from Corunna to Fonta- 
rabia, as I traversed one side of it for the dis- 
tance of an hundred and thirty-eight leagues from 
VV. to E. This is a most beautiful island, and 
although I have taken possession of them all, in 
the name of their Highnesses, and every one 
remains in their power, and as much at their 
disposal as the kingdoms of Castile, and although 
they are all furnished with every thing that can 
be desired, yet the preference must be given to 
Espanola, on account of the mines of gold which 
it possesses, and the facilities it offers for trade 
with the continent, and countries this side, and 
beyond that of the Great Can, which traffic will 
be great and profitable. I have accordingly 
taken possession of a place, which I named Villa 
de Navidad, and built there a fortress, which is 
at present complete, and furnished with a suf- 
ficiency of men for the enterprise; with these I 
have left arms, ammunition and provisions for 
more than a year, a boat, and expert men in all 
necessary arts. The king of the country has 
shown great friendship toward us, and held 



OF COLUMBUS, 261 

himself a brother to me. Even should their 
friendly inclinations change, and become hostile, 
yet nothing can be feared from them as they 
are totally ignorant of weapons, and the most 
timorous people in the world. The small 
number of men whom I have left there would 
be sufficient to ravage the whole territory, 
and they may remain there with perfect 
safety, taking proper care of themselves. In 
all the islands, as far as I could observe, the men 
are content with a single wife each, except that 
a chief or king has as many as twenty. The 
women appear to do more work than the men, 
and as to their property, I have been unable to 
learn that they have any private possessions, but 
apparently all things are in common among them, 
especially provisions. In none of the islands 
hitherto visited, have I found any people of 
monstrous appearance, according to the expec- 
tation of some, but the inhabitants are all of very 
pleasing aspect, not resembling the blacks of 
Guinea, as their hair is straight, and their colour 
lighter. The rays of the sun are here very pow- 
erful, although the latitude is twenty-six degrees, 
but in the islands where there are high moun- 
tains, the winter is cold, which the inhabitants 
endure from habit, and the use of hot spices with 
their food. An island situated in the second 
strait at the entrance to the Indies, is peopled 



262 FIRST VOYAGE 

with inhabitants who eat live flesh, and are es- 
teemed very ferocious in all the other parts. 
They possess many canoes with which they 
scour all the islands of India, robbing and captur- 
ing all they meet. They are not of a more de- 
formed appearance than the others, except that 
they wear their hair long like women, and use 
bows and arrows, which last are made of cane 
and pointed with a stick, for want of iron, which 
they do not possess. They exchange their 
wives, and although these are esteemed a fierce 
people among the neighboring islands, yet I do 
not regard them more than the others, as the 
most of the inhabitants of these regions are very 
great cowards. One of these islands is peopled 
solely by women, who practise no feminine oc- 
cupations, but exercise the bow and arrow, and 
cover themselves with plates of copper, which 
metal they have in abundance. There is anoth- 
er island, as I am assured, larger than Espanola, 
in which the inhabitants are without hair, and 
which contains a great abundance of gold. In 
confirmation of these, and other accounts I have 
brought the indians along with me for testimo- 
nies. In conclusion, and to speak only of what I 
have performed ; this voyage, so hastily dispatch- 
ed, will, as their Highnesses may see, enable any 
desirable quantity of gold to be obtained, by a 
very small assistance afforded me on their part. 



OF COLUMBUS. 263 

At present there are within reach, spices and 
cotton to as great an amount as they can desire, 
aloe in as agreat bundance, and equal store of mas- 
tick, a production nowhere else found except in 
Greece and the island of Scio, where it is sold 
at such a price as the possessors choose. To 
these may be added slaves, as numerous as may 
be wished for. Besides I have as I think, dis- 
covered rhubarb and cinnamon, and expect 
countless other things of value will be found by 
the men w r hom 1 have left there, as I made it 
a point not to stay in any one place, while the 
wind enabled me to proceed upon the voyage, 
except at Villa de Navidad, where I left them, 
well established. I should have accomplished 
much more, had those in the other vessels done 
their duty. This is ever certain, that God grants 
to those that walk in his ways, the performance 
of things which seem impossible, and this enter- 
prize might in a signal manner have been consid- 
ered so, for although many have talked of these 
countries, yet it has been nothing more than con- 
jecture. Our Saviour having vouchsafed this 
victory to our most illustrious King and Queen 
and their kingdoms, famous for so eminent a deed, 
all Christendom should rejoice, and give solemn 
thanks to the holy Trinity for the addition of 
so many people to our holy faith, and also for the 



264 FIRST VOYAGE 

temporal profit accruing not only to Spain, but to 
all christians. 

Onboard the Caravel, off the Azores, February Uith, 1493. 

P. S. After writing the above, being at sea 
near Castile, the wind rose with such fury from 
the S. and SE., that I was obliged to bear away, 
and run into the port of Lisbon, where I escaped 
by the greatest miracle in the world. From 
this place I shall write to their Highnesses. 
Throughout the Indies I always found the wea- 
ther like May. I made the passage thither in 
seventy-one days, and back in forty-eight, during 
thirteen of which number I was driven about by 
storms. The seamen here inform me that there 
was never known a winter, in which so many 
ships were lost. 

March 4th. 



NOTES. 



33 



NOTES. 



NOTE I. 

Letter of Paul Toscanelli,* a Florentine physician, and celebrated as- 
tronomer to Columbus, dated June 25th, 1474, eighteen years before 
his first voyage. 

As this letter, according to the statement of 
Don Fernando Columbus in his biography of his 
father, had a great effect in causing Columbus to 
undertake the voyage, it has been thought de- 
serving of a place here, more especially as it 
serves to illustrate several passages in the nar- 
rative. The immediate occasion of it was this : 
While Columbus was at Lisbon, a correspon- 
dence was maintained between Toscanelli, and 
Fernando Martinez, a prebendary of that place, 
respecting the commerce of the Portuguese to 
the coast of Guinea, and the navigation of the 
ocean to the W. This came to the knowledge 
of Columbus, who at that time entertained 

* For an account of this person see Tiraboschi Storia 
della Letteratura Italiana. Tom. 6. Lib. 2. Cap. 38. 



268 NOTES. 

thoughts of his future enterprise. He thereupon 
dispatched by an Italian then at Lisbon, a letter 
to the Florentine, informing him of his project. 
He received the following answer written in 
Latin. 

To Dow Christopher Columbcs, greeting. 

T have become acquainted with the great and 
noble wish entertained by you, to visit the coun- 
try of spices, on which account I send in an- 
swer to your letter, the copy of one directed by 
me, a few days since, to one of my friends, in the 
service of the King of Portugal before the wars 
of Castile ; he having written to me, by order 
of his Highness, upon the same subject. I also 
send you a nautical chart, similar to one which I 
likewise presented to him; these may perhaps 
satisfy your inquiries. The copy of my letter is 
as follows. 

To Fernando Martinez, prebendary of Lisbon, 
greeting — I feel a great pleasure in hearing of 
the intimacy between you and the Most Serene 
and Magnificent King. Although I have spoken 
many times concerning the short passage by sea 
from hence to the Indies, where the spices are 
produced, which course, in my opinion is shorter 
than that to Guinea, yet you inform me that his 
Highness wishes for some declaration or demon- 



NOTES. 269 

stration on my part, whereby he may more fully 
understand the matter. This I could do to his 
satisfaction, with the help of a terrestrial globe, 
instructing him how the parts of the earth are 
disposed. But for greater facility and precision, 
I have determined to mark down the route in 
question upon a marine chart, which I herewith 
send to his Majesty, drawn and painted by my 
hand. In this is represented the whole extremi- 
ty of the W., from Ireland, S. to Guinea, with 
all the islands in the whole extent. Opposite, in 
the W. is the commencement of the Indies, with 
the isles and accessible parts, and the space be- 
tween the North pole and the Equinoctial line. 
In this manner will be perceived the number of 
leagues necessary to proceed in order to reach 
those fertile countries which abound in spices 
and precious stones. Let it not create wonder 
that a westerly region is assigned for the country 
of spices, which have always been understood to 
grow in the E. ; for those who sail W. will find 
those lands in the W., and those who travel E., 
will find the same places in the E. The straight 
lines, which run lengthwise upon the chart, show 
the distance from W. to E. The oblique ones, 
the distance from N. to S. I have also marked 
down many places among the Indies, which may 
be reached by the occurrence of some casual 
event, such as contrary winds, or unlooked for 



270 NOTES. 

accident of that sort. And in order that you 
may be made fully acquainted with whatever 
relates to this subject, [ will give you the result 
of my investigations. The islands I have spoken 
of, are inhabited by merchants who carry on their 
trade among many nations ; their ports contain a 
greater number of foreign vessels, than those of 
any other part of the world. The single port of 
Zaiton, which is one of the finest and most famous 
throughout the E., sends forth annually, more 
than a hundred ships laden with pepper, not to 
mention others, which return with cargoes of all 
sorts of spices. The whole territory is very 
extensive and populous, containing many pro- 
vinces and kingdoms, under the dominion of a 
prince called Great Can, which signifies King of 
King's. The common residence of this sovereign 
is in Cathay. His predecessors were desirous of 
an intercourse with the Christians, and two hun- 
dred years since, dispatched ambassadors to the 
Pope, requesting instructors to teach them our 
holy faith. These, however, were unable, from 
the obstacles they encountered upon their jour- 
nev, to reach Rome, and were forced to return 
back. In the time of Pope Eugenius IV. there 
came an ambassador, who gave him assurances 
of the affection which was entertained for the 
Catholics by the princes and people of his coun- 
try. I was a great deal in his company, and he 



NOTES. 271 

gave me descriptions of the magnificence of his 
king, and of the immense rivers in that territory, 
which contained, as he stated, two hundred cities 
with marble bridges, upon the banks of a single 
stream. This is a noble country, and ought to 
be explored by us, on account of its great riches, 
and the quantity of gold, silver, and precious 
stones, which might be obtained there. For their 
governors, they choose the wisest men, without 
regard to rank or riches. You will perceive by 
the map, that the distance from Lisbon, to the 
famous city of Quisay, is three thousand nine 
hundred miles, going exactly W. This city is 
thirty-five leagues in circuit, and its name signifies 
City of Heaven. Its situation is in the province 
of Mango near Cathay, and it contains ten large 
marble bridges built upon immense columns, of 
singular magnificence. From the island of An- 
tilla to that of Cipango, is a distance of two 
hundred and twenty-five leagues. This island 
possesses such an abundance of precious stones 
and metals that the temples and royal palaces 
are covered with plates of gold. I might add 
many things here, but as I have formerly given 
you a relation of them, I trust to your wisdom 
and good judgement, without making any fur- 
ther addition to this statement. I hope my let- 
ter will satisfy his Highness, and I beg you will 



272 NOTES. 

assure him, that I shall be always ready to exe- 
cute his commands. 

Florence, June 25/A, 1474. 



ANOTHER LETTER FROM THE SAME TO COLUMBUS. 

1 have received your letter with its accom- 
paniment, for which I return you my thanks. 
I applaud your design of sailing to the West, and 
am persuaded, as you will have seen by my 
chart, that the voyage you intend to undertake, 
has none of the difficulties ascribed to it. The 
passage, in my opinion, will be found easy and 
safe, in the quarters which 1 have pointed out. 
You would entertain no doubt upon this matter, 
had you conversed with the many persons from 
those countries, whom 1 have seen. You may 
be certain of meeting with extensive kingdoms, 
populous cities, and rich provinces, abounding in 
all sorts of precious stones, and your visit will 
cause great rejoicing to the King and Princes of 
those distant lands, besides opening a way for a 
communication between them and the Christians, 
and the instruction of them in the catholic lelig- 
ion and the arts we possess. For whic 1 easons, 
and many others which might be mentioned, I 



NOTES. 273 

am not surprised at the courage and resolution 
manifested by you, and the whole Portuguese 
nation, which has never been deficient in eminent 
men. 



NOTE II. 

It may be interesting to subjoin a few speci- 
mens of the accounts, both probable and improb- 
able, which contributed at that time to the pop- 
ular belief of the existence of countries in the 
West. The following are from the biography 
of Don Fernando : 

* Martin Vincent, Pilot of the King of Portugal, 
related, that four hundred and fifty leagues West 
of Cape St. Vincent, he had picked up a log, 
perfectly wrought, but not with iron, and which 
had been brought thither by a westerly wind, 
from this circumstance he concluded that there 
were indubitably, undiscovered islands in that 
quarter. 

Pedro Correa, brother-in-law of Columbus, in- 
formed him that he had seen near the island of 
Porto Santo, a fragment of wood similar to the 
former, and which came from the West. He 
34 



274 N0TE9. 

also learned from the King of Portugal, that in 
the same parts there had been found canes of 
such bigness that a single joint would contain 
nine garrafas of wine. 

The inhabitants of the Azores related to him 
that after a course of westerly winds, the sea 
coast upon the shores of those islands, and espe- 
cially those of Graciosa, and Fayal, pine trees, 
which were not the growth of those parts, and 
that in the island of Flores, the bodies of two 
men had been washed ashore, whose complexion 
and features were different from those of any peo- 
ple in that neighborhood. Others informed him 
that they had seen covered boats, filled with 
people of an uncommon description. 

Antonio Leme, a resident in the island of Ma- 
deira, told the Admiral, that having sailed far to 
the West, he discovered three islands. Pedro 
de Velasco, a native of Palos, related to him that 
sailing an hundred and fifty leagues toward the 
West, he discovered the island of Flores by fol- 
lowing the flight of some birds, and that after- 
wards he sailed to the NE as far as the latitude 
of Cape Clear in Ireland, where he met with 
strong winds from the West with a smooth sea ; 
this, he thought, could be explained only by 
supposing the existence of land in that direction. 



NOTES. 275 

which kept the sea from rising. It being late 
in the season, he did not venture to undertake 
the discovery of it. This happened above forty 
years before the discovery of the Indies. 

Another pilot informed him in the port of 
Santa Maria, that upon a voyage to Ireland, he 
descried a country, which he took for a part of 
Tartary. It extended toward the W., but he 
could not reach it on account of the unfavorable 
state of the weather. This was probably the 
land now called Bacalaos* Another Pedro de 
Velasco, a Galician, gave him the same account 
in the city of Murcia, saying that on his passage 
towards Ireland he discovered a country in the 
West, which he believed to be that which Fer- 
nan Dolmos attempted to reach.' Hist, del Al- 
mirante, Cap. 8. 



4 The mother-in-law of the Admiral perceiv- 
ing what pleasure he took in hearing the ac- 
counts of these voyages, presented him with the 
writings and charts which had belonged to her 

* Bacaleo, or Bucalieu, an island on the East coast of 
Newfoundland. 



276 NOTES. 

husband ; the perusal of these increased the zeal 
of the Admiral, and he undertook many inquiries 
concerning the navigation of the Portuguese to 
the Mine and the coast of Guinea, and took great 
interest in conversation with those who had fre- 
quented those parts. I have not been able to 
ascertain whether during this matrimonial con- 
nection he made any voyages to the Mine or to 
Guinea; be that however, as it will, he began 
very naturally to reflect, while in Portugal, that 
as the Portuguese had sailed such a distance S., 
it was also possible to sail in a Westerly direc- 
tion, and find land in that quarter. In order to cor- 
roborate this opinion, he examined anew those ge- 
ographical writers which he had studied at a for- 
mer period, and endeavoured to find what astro- 
nomical reasons would confirm the notion. He 
was careful to treasure up whatever information 
relating to this matter he could collect from trav- 
ellers or seamen. In this manner he came to a 
firm persuasion that to the West of the Canaries 
and Cape Verd there were islands which might be 
reached by sailing in that direction. But to un- 
derstand more fully the reasons which led to this 
conclusion, and to satisfy the curiosity of many 
who are desirous of knowing distinctly the argu- 
ments and motives upon which the Admiral 
founded his great undertaking, I will relate what 



NOTES. 277 

I have been able to find among his papers to this 
effect. 

The causes which induced the Admiral to 
conceive the idea of discovering the Indies were 
three, namely, — Reasons drawn from a consider- 
ation of the figure of the earth ; The authority 
of writers ; and the relations of seamen. 

With respect to the first, he considered that 
as the land and water of which the earth is 
composed formed a sphere, it might be sailed 
round from East to West, till men came to stand 
(eet to feet on the two opposite sides of the 
earth. 

With regard to the second, he judged from 
creditable authors that the greater part of this 
sphere had been explored, and that there re- 
mained undiscovered only that portion comprised 
between the eastern extremity of India, known 
to Ptolemy and Marinus, and the Azores and 
Cape Verd Islands, which then were the farthest 
West of any known territory. 

As to the third, he was of opinion that the 
space contained within these limits was not above 
a third part of the circumference of the earth, 
inasmuch as the above-mentioned Marinus had 



278 NOTES. 

travelled to the East a distance of fifteen twen- 
ty-fourths of this circumference, so that their re- 
mained but nine twenty-fourths from the East of 
India to the Cape Verd Islands. 

Furthermore he considered that the territo- 
ries described in the Cosmography of Marinus, 
although extending the distance above specified, 
did not reach the extremity of the continent, 
and therefore the distance from that to the 
West of Europe must be still smaller. If this 
space were sea, he judged it might be sailed 
over in a short time ; if it were land it might 
be discovered still sooner by going to the West, 
as it must necessarily lie very near the Cape 
Verd Islands. These opinions were strengthened 
by what is stated in Strabo's fifth book of Geo- 
graphy, that no army has ever readied the east- 
ern limit of India, which is a country as large, 
according to Ctesias, as all the rest of Asia, and 
agreeably to the assertion of Onesicritus is equal 
to a third part of the globe, and the like is affirm- 
ed by Pliny. Lib. 6. Cap. 17. to which may be 
added the statement of Nearchus, that it is four 
months' journey in extent ; from all which con- 
siderations he came to an opinion that its immense 
size must bring it near to Spain in the West. 

Another reason which induced him to believe 
that the distance from the West of Europe to 



NOTES. 279 

India was small, was the opinion of Alfraganus 
and his followers, who assign a much smaller ex- 
tent to the circumference of the earth than other 
writers, allowing but fifty-six miles and two thirds 
to a degree, which diminishing the extent of the 
earth's surface, would also diminish the space 
between India and Europe which was unknown 
to Marinus. On this account he judged that 
whatever lands were discovered in the West 
must necessarily be a part of India, and for the 
same reason we may pronounce as unwarranta- 
able the censures cast upon the Admiral bv Rod- 
rigo, Archdeacon of Seville and some of his 
party for bestowing the name of India upon 
these countries, which appellation they assert is 
not appropriate. Now the Admiral did not call 
them Indies as being the identical lands known 
by that name, but as being a part of that India 
beyond the Ganges which no geographer has set 
limits to by any other territory, but which has 
been regarded as extending to the ocean. These 
therefore being lands at the eastern limits of 
India, not designated by any particular name, it 
was judged most proper to bestow upon them 
that of the nearest country; they were thus 
called the West Indies on account of the known 
riches of the country of India. In this manner 
he extended an invitation to the Catholic Kin°-s 
who were doubtful of the enterprise, to aid him 
in discovering the Indies by the way of the West. 



280 NOTES. 

The Admiral was further incited to his under- 
taking, and supported in the opinion that the 
lands to the West were a part of India, by the 
authority of many learned men who affirmed 
that a passage might be made from the West of 
Africa and Spain, to the Eastern part of India by 
following a Westerly course, and that the ocean 
which separated these countries was not of great 
extent. This is averred by Aristotle, Lib. 2. de 
Ccelo et Mundo. where he states that one might 
pass from India to Cadiz in a tew days. The 
same is confirmed by a remark of Averrhoes 
upon this passage. And Seneca, Nat. Quaest. 
Lib. 1. regarding the learning of this world as 
nothing when compared to the knowledge which 
may be obtained in another life, observes that a 
ship may sail with a fair wind from the Western 
part of Spain to India in a few days. And if as 
some assure us, Seneca was the author of the 
tragedies which go by his name, we may be cer- 
tain that he refers to this fact in the chorus 

to Medea. 

Venient annis 

Secula seris, quibus Oceanus 

Vincula rerum laxet, et ingens 

Pateat tellus, Tiphisque novos 

Detegat orbes, nee sit Terris 

Ultima ThuJe 



NOTES. 28 1 

" In the last days there will come an age in which 
Ocean shall loosen the bonds of things; a great 
country will be discovered; another Tiphis shall 
make known new worlds, and Thule shall no longer 
be the extremity of the earth.' 9 This prediction 
may assuredly be considered as accomplished in 
the person of the Admiral. 

Strabo, in the first book of his Geography, 
says the Ocean encompasses the whole earth, 
that it washes India on the East, and on the 
West, Spain and Mauritania, and but for its 
vast extent, one might sail directly from the one 
of these countries to the other; the same he 
repeats in the second book. 

Pliny, in his Natural History, L. 2. Cap. 3. 
states that the Ocean surrounds the earth, ex- 
tending from India to Cadiz ; the same in Cap. 
31. Lib. C. 

Solinus, Cap. 48. says that from the Gorgonean 
Islands, by which we are to understand those of 
Cape Verd, there are fortv days sail across the 
Atlantic Ocean to the Isles of the Hespcrides ; 
these the Admiral held for certain were the 
Indies. 

Marco Polo and Sir John Mandeville assert 
in their Travels into the East, that they 
went far beyond the countries described by 
35 



282 



NOTES. 



Ptolemy and Marinus ; and although these trav- 
ellers do not speak of the Eastern Ocean, yet it 
may be inferred from their description of the 
Oriental territories, that India is not far distant 
from Africa and Spain. 

It is also affirmed by Petrus Heliacus, in his 
treatise De imagine mundi, Cap. 8. de quantitate 
terrce habitabilis, and by Julius Capitolinus, De 
locis habitabilibus, and in other treatises that 
Spain is near to India in the West. This last 
author in the 19th chapter of his Geography 
has these words. ' According to Pliny and the 
Philosophers, the ocean lying between Spain and 
Western Africa on one side, and the extremity 
of India on the other, is not of great extent, and 
without doubt may be crossed with a favorable 
wind in a few days ; the Eastern part of India 
therefore is not very distant from the West of 
Africa.'' Hist, del Almirante, Cap. V. et seq. 



NOTE III. 

The reception of Columbus at the Portuguese 
court is related by Barros with every feeling of 
national prejudice. ' The king being in Val do 
Paraiso. at the monastery of Nossa Senhora das 



NOTES. 



283 



Virtudes, in Santarem, on account of the pesti- 
lence which raged at that time, there came ac- 
counts from Lisbon, that one Christopher Colum- 
bus had arrived there, stating that he had come 
from the island of Cipango, with much gold and 
riches of that country. The king having some 
acquaintance with this Columbus, and knowing 
that he had been sent upon the discovery by Don 
Ferdinand, King of Castile, requested him to pay 
him a visit, that he might learn the events of his 
voyage. This he readily complied with, not so 
much from a wish to oblige the King, as to mor- 
tify him with his presence, for before he went to 
Castile, he had applied to this same King Dun 
John, entreating to be sent by him upon the en- 
terprise. This the King had refused, for rea- 
sons which I shall hereafter relate. Columbus 
was received very respectfully by the King, but 
the latter was much concerned on perceiving 
that the natives of the newly discovered coun- 
tries, which he had brought along with him, were 
not black and woolly-headed, like those of Guin- 
ea, but similar in features, complexion, and hair to 
the people of India, where he was engaged in such 
important undertakings. Columbus in discours- 
ing of those countries and extolling their charac- 
ter to an extravagant degree, used so great a free- 
dom of language, chiding and censuring the King 
for not having taken up with his oiFer, that many 



284 NOTES. 

of the nobles stung to resentment by the license 
of his tongue, as well as vexed that the King had 
lost the benefits of the enterprise, offered to pre- 
vent his return to Castile by assassinating him. 
For to all appearance, his arrival was likely to be 
very prejudicial to this kingdom, and cause great 
trouble to his Highness on account of the grants 
made by the popes, from the limits comprised in 
which, it appeared to be manifest that these na- 
tives were taken by Columbus. The King re- 
jected these offers, and like a Catholic Prince, 
rebuked the nobles who made them, although 
the business gave him some concern.' Asia de 
Joam de Barros. Dec. 1. Liv. III. C. XI. See 
also Lafitau. Hist, des Decouvertes et Conquetes 
des Portugais. i Colomb etoit si fier dusucces de 
son voyage, il en parloit avec tant d'emphase et 
d'exageration, entremelant a ce qui'il disoit, des 
reproches qu'il fit au Roi sur le peu de confiance 
qu'il avoit eu en lui, et sur la perte qu'il s'etoit 
causee par-la a lui-mcme, qu'il parut n'etre ven- 
ue dans ses ports que pour lui faire insulte.' etc. 
Liv. I. Bouterwek is so much impressed with 
the acrimony of expression, prompted by the na- 
tional feeling of the Portuguese writers on this 
occasion, as to ask 'war dcr Entdecker von Jimeri- 
ka etica wirklich em GrossprahkrP Gesch. der 
Portiiff. Poesie u. Bereds. B. 2. C. 2. 



NOTES. 285 

The testimony however, of other historians 
acquits him of any such superciliousness of be- 
haviour on the occasion referred to. ' L'on fut 
surpris de voir que ce Pilote que, quelques an- 
nees auparavant on avoit regarde comme un hom- 
me de neant, et qui se repaissoit de chimeres, re- 
pondoit a tout avec la dignite d'un Amiral & d' 
un Vice-Roi, et parloit toujours fort sensement.' 
Charlevoix. Hist, de St. Domingue, Liv. II. 



APPENDIX. 



APPENDIX. 



Stipulation between Columbus and the King and Queen of Spain, re- 
specting the voyage. 

The conditions which your Highnesses shall 
grant to Don Christopher Columbus in recom- 
pense of the discoveries which he may make 
upon the seas in the voyage now about, by the 
help of God, to be undertaken for the service of 
your Highnesses are the following. 

First, your Highnesses in virtue of your do- 
minion over the said seas, shall constitute from 
this time forth, the said Don Christopher Co- 
lumbus your Admiral in all the islands and ter- 
ritories which he may discover or acquire in the 
said seas, this power to continue in him during 
his life, and at his death to descend to his heirs 
and successors from one to another perpetually, 
with all the dignities and prerogatives appertain- 
36 



290 APPENDtX. 

ing to the said office, and according to the man- 
ner in which this dignity has been held by Don 
Alonzo Henriquez, your High Admiral of Cas- 
tile, and by the other Admirals in their several 
districts. 

Granted by their Highnesses, 

JUAJN DE COLOMA, 



Furthermore, your Highnesses shall constitute 
the said Don Christopher Columbus your Vice- 
roy and Governor General in all the said islands 
and territories to be discovered as abovesaid in 
the said seas ; and for the government of each 
place three persons shall be named by him, out 
of which number your Highnesses shall select one 
to hold the office in question. 

Granted by their Highnesses, 

JUAN DE COLOMA. 



Furthermore, in the acquisition by trade, dis- 
covery, or any other method, of all goods, mer- 
chandise, pearls, precious stones, gold, silver, 
spices and all other articles, within the limits of 
the said Admiralty, the tenth part of their value 
shall be the property of the said Don Christo- 
pher Columbus, after deducting the amount ex- 



APPENDIX. 29 1 

pended in obtaining them, and the other nine 
tenths shall be the property of your Highnesses. 

Granted by their Highnesses. 

JUAN DE COLOMA. 



Furthermore, if any controversy or law-suit 
should arise in these territories relating to the 
goods which he may obtain there, or relating to 
any goods which others may obtain by trade in 
the same places, the jurisdiction in the said cases 
shall by virtue of his office of Admiral, pertain to 
him alone or his Deputy. 

Granted by their Highnesses, provided the 
said prerogative belong to the office of 
Admiral, according as that dignity has 
been held by the abovementioned Admi- 
ral Don Alonzo Henriquez, and the others 
of that rank in their several districts, and 
provided the said regulation be just. 

JUAN DE COLOMA. 



Furthermore, in the fitting out of any fleets 
for the purpose of trade in the said territories, 
the said Don Christopher Columbus shall on 
every such occasion, be allowed the privilege 
of furnishing one eighth of the expenses of the 



* 



292 APPENDIX. 

expedition, and shall at such times receive an 
eighth part of the profits arising therefrom. 

Granted by their Highnesses. 

JUAN DE COLOMA. 

Agreed and stipulated, with the answers of 
their Highnesses to each article of the contract, 
in the city of Granada, on the seventeenth day 
of April, in the year of our Saviour Jesus Christ, 
one thousand four hundred and ninety-two. 

I THE KING, 
I THE QUEEN. 
By order of the King and Queen. 

JUAN DE COLOMA. 

Registered. 

Calcena. 



Commission of Admiral, Viceroy and Governor in (he isles and territo- 
ries which may be discovered, granted by the King and Queen to 
Christopher Columbus. 

Don Ferdinand and Dona Isabel, by the grace 
of God, King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Arra- 
gon, &c. Inasmuch as you Christopher Colum- 
bus are about to depart by our orders, and with 
certain of our ships and men, for the discovery 



APPENDIX. 



293 



of sundry islands and territories in the ocean, 
and it is hoped, with the help of God, that you 
will effect the discovery and acquisition of some 
of the said islands and territories, and considering 
that as you encounter the said hazards for our 
service, it is just and reasonable you should re- 
ceive a proper remuneration, therefore, with a 
desire to grant the necessary honors and rewards 
for the above consideration, it is our will and 
pleasure that you, the said Christopher Colum- 
bus, having discovered and acquired the said is- 
lands and territories or any part of them, shall 
be our Admiral, Viceroy, and Governor in those 
places, and that you thenceforth entitle youself 
Don Christopher Columbus, and that your sons 
and successors in the said charge and office, also 
entitle themselves Don and Admiral, Viceroy and 
Governor in those places ; and that you exercise 
the said office of Admiral, Viceroy and Governor 
in the islands and territories which may be discov- 
ered and acquired by you and your Lieutenants 
and Deputies ; and that you hear and decide all 
suits and causes, both civil and criminal, which 
pertain to the said office of Admiral, Viceroy 
and Governor, according to the just extent of 
the power of that office, and according to the 
privileges of the Admirals of our dominions ; and 
that you have power to execute all necessary 
punishments ; and that you exercise all the func- 



294 APPENDIX. 

tions properly belonging to the said office of Ad- 
miral, Viceroy and Governor, as also your Dep- 
uties; and that you enjoy all the privileges and 
salaries appertaining to the abovementioned 
offices as they are accustomed to be held by 
our High Admiral of Castile, and the Viceroys 
and Governors throughout our dominions. 

And we signify by this commission, to the 
Prince Don Juan, our well-beloved son, and to 
the Infantas, Dukes, &c. &c, Judges, Chancellors, 
&c. &c, Magistrates, &c. &c. throughout our 
kingdoms, and thoughout the territories which 
may be acquired by you, and to the Captains, 
Officers, &c, our subjects at sea, for the present 
and future time — to all and each one of them, 
that the said islands and territories being dis- 
covered and acquired by you in the said ocean, 
and the customary and requisite declarations and 
solemnities having been published by you or your 
Deputy — they are thenceforth to acknowledge 
and regard you as our Admiral of the said Ocean, 
and as Viceroy and Governor of the said islands 
and territories which you the said Don Christo- 
pher Columbus shall have discovered and ac- 
quired; and that they acknowledge and regard 
you as such during your life, and afterwards your 
son and successor, and so on from successor to 
successor forever; and that they acknowledge 
and regard as the same whomsoever you shajl 



APPENDIX. 295 

constitute your Deputy or Lieutenant ; and that 
they grant to you all the salaries, duties, and 
other privileges belonging to the said office ; and 
they extend to you all the honors, dignities, im- 
munities, liberties, powers, &c. which justly be- 
long to the abovementioned office of Admiral, 
Viceroy and Governor, in such a manner that no 
deficiency or limitation e\ist in that respect, and 
that you encounter no hindrance or restriction in 
the exercise of the said office. We therefore 
by this commission confer upon you the office of 
Admiral, Viceroy and Governor, to be held in 
hereditary possession forever with all the privi- 
leges and salaries pertaining thereto, &c. &c. 

To which end we hereby order, (if the same 
be necessary and requested by you) our Chancel- 
lor, Notaries, and other officers to whom this 
matter pertains, that they furnish you with a 
power to this effect, signed, sealed and attested 
in the fullest and most authentic manner; this or- 
der to be complied with as they value our favour, 
and under a penalty of ten thousand maravedis 
for any disobedience thereof. And whoever in 
such a case shall exhibit this our commission, shall 
be authorised to summon the said persons to ap- 
pear before us, at our court, wherever that may 
happen to be, within fifteen days from the date 
of the summons, under the abovementioned 



296 APPENDIX. 

penalty ; for the verification of which act we 
hereby command whatever public notary shall 
be applied to for that purpose, to furnish the 
necessary attestations signed by his hand, in 
order that we may be assured of the due 
performance of our orders. 

Given in our city of Granada on the ~\ J TJJE KING. 
thirtieth day of April in the year of F 

our Saviour Jesus Christ, one thou f j TOT? i"kTTr , T7'\r 

sand four hundred and ninety-two. ) ' 1 tlH* Jq£U JiilliiN. 

By order of the King and Queen. 

JUAN DE COLOMA, Secretary. 

Executed in due form, 

RODERICUS, Doctor. 

Registered, 

SEBASTIAN DE OLANO, 
FRANCISCO DE MADRID, 

Chancellor. 



APPENDIX. 297 

REQUISITION UPON THE INHABITANTS OF PALOS FOR TWO 
OF THE VESSELS COMPOSING THE FLEET. 

Don Ferdinand and Dona Isabel, by the grace of 
God, King and Queen ofCastile, Leon, Arragon 
&c. &c. to you Diego Rodriguez Prieto, and to 
all other persons inhabitants of the town of Pa- 
los, greeting. You are well aware that in con- 
sequence of some offence which we received at 
your hands, you were condemned by our council 
to render us the service of two caravels armed at 
your own expense for the space of twelve months, 
whenever and wherever it should be our pleas- 
ure to demand the same, this service to be ren- 
dered under certain penalties, as stated more at 
large in the sentence given against you. 

And inasmuch as we have ordered Christopher 
Columbus to proceed with a fleet of three cara- 
vels, as our Captain, to certain parts of the ocean 
upon a matter connected with our service, and 
we desire that the two caravels, the service of 
which you owe us as abovesaid, should be placed 
at his disposal — we hereby order that within ten 
days from the sight of this letter, without delay 
or waiting for any further directions, you have 
in complete readiness the said two armed cara- 
vels for the service of the above-mentioned 
37 



298 APPENDIX. 

Christopher Columbus in the enterprise upon 
which we have dispatched him, and that they be 
placed at his command from that time forth ; 
and for the crews of the said two caravels we 
order him to pay you forthwith four months' 
wages at the same rate with which the crew of 
the other caravel is paid, being the common al- 
lowance for ships of war. 

The vessels thus placed under his direction shall 
follow the route ordered by him on our part, ai d 
obey him in all other orders, provided that nei- 
ther you nor the said Christopher Columbus, nor 
any other persons belonging to the said caravels 
shall proceed to the mine, nor to the countries in 
that neighborhood occupied by the King of Portu- 
gal our brother, as it is our desire to adhere to the 
agreement existing between us and the said King 
of Portugal upon that head. 

And having received a certificate from the 
said Captain, that he has received the said two 
caravels from you, and is satisfied with the same, 
we shall consider you as having discharged the 
obligation imposed upon you by our Council as 
abovesaid,and we hereby declare you thenceforth 
free from the same; but in the event of the non- 
fulfilment or procrastination of the above order, 
we shall forthwith command the execution of the 



APPENDIX. 299 

penalties contained in the aforesaid sentence, 
upon each one of you and jour goods. 

The above requisition is to be complied with 
throughout, under pain of our displeasure and a 
penalty of ten thousand maravedis for the non- 
performance of any part thereof, to which end 
we herebj order under the said penalty, what- 
ever public notary may be called upon for that 
purpose, to furnish you with the proper signed 
attestations, that we may be assured of the fulfil- 
ment of our orders. 

Given in the city of Granada, on \ I TfJE KING 
on the thirtieth day of April, in F 
the year of our Lord Jesus Christ /■ 

one thousand four hundred and V f T^HE QUEEN 
ninety-two. * " 

JUAN DE COLOMA, Secretary 

of the King and Queen, Sfc. fyc. 

Done in due form, 

RODERICUS, Doctor. 

Registered, 

SEBASTIAN DE OLANO, 
FRANCISCO DE MADRID, 

Chancellor. 



300 APPENDIX. 



Charter of Immunity, granted by the King and Queen, exempting 
the crew of the fleet from arrest or detention by the civil au- 
thority. 

Don Ferdinand and Dona Isabel, by the grace 
of God, King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Arra- 
gon, &c. &c. &c. — To the members of our Coun- 
cil, Oidors of our Court of Audience, Corregi- 
dores, Asistentes, Alcaldes, Alguacils, Merinos, 
and all other magistrates whatsoever of all the 
cities, towns and villages of our kingdoms and 
dominions, to every one who shall see this writ- 
ing or a copy of the same attested by a public 
notary — greeting. 

Be it known to you that we have ordered 
Christopher Columbus to proceed to sea for the 
accomplishment of certain business for our ser- 
vice, and as we are informed by him that in or- 
der to man the fleet which he is to command 
for the execution of this purpose, it is necessary 
to grant a security to the persons composing the 
crew of the same, who would be otherwise un- 
willing to embark, and being requested by him 
to give the necessary orders for this measure, we 
have determined to grant what is demanded by 
him relating to this matter. 



APPENDIX. 301 

We therefore hereby grant a security to each 
and every person belonging to the crews of the 
fleet of the said Christopher Columbus, in the 
voyage by sea which he is about to undertake 
by our command, exempting them from all hind- 
rance or incommodity either in their persons 
or goods ; and we declare them privileged from 
arrest or detention on account of any offence or 
crime which may have been committed by therfi 
up to the date of this instrument, and during the 
time they may be upon the voyage, and for two 
months after their return to their homes. 

And we hereby command you, all and each 
one, in your several districts and jurisdictions, 
that you abstain from trying any criminal cause 
touching the persons of the crews under the 
command of the said C-^istopher Columbus, dur- 
ing the time above specified, it being our will and 
pleasure that every matter of this sort remain 
suspended. This order is to be complied with 
as you value our favour, and under a penalty of 
ten thousand maravedis for any infringement of 
the same. 

And we hereby furthermore command every 
public notary who shall be applied to for any 
purpose connected with the above mentioned 
mandate, that he furnish all the proper signed 



302 APPENDIX. 

attestations which are necessary in the case, in 
order that we may be assured of the due per- 
formance of our orders. 

Given in our city of Granada, the \ \ THE KING. 

thirtieth day of April, in the year f 

of our Saviour Jesus Christ, one / 

thousand four hundred and nine- % J THE QUEEN 

ty-two. J ^ 

JUAN DE COLOMA, Secretary. 

Executed in due form, 

RODERICUS, Doctor. 
FRANCISCO DE MADRID. 

Chancellor. 



LETTER OF THE KING AND C EEN TO COLUMBUS UPON 
HIS RETURN FROM THE DISCOVERY. 

The King and Queen to Don Christopher Co- 
lumbus our Admiral of the Ocean, and Viceroy 
and Governor of the Islands discovered in the 
Indies : — We have seen your letters and receiv- 
ed much pleasure from their contents. We are 
rejoiced that God has granted so fortunate an is- 
sue to your enterprise, which will redound much 
to his service and to the profit of ourselves and 



APPENDIX. 303 

our dominions. For these great services we hope 
to reward you in a manner suitable to your mer- 
its ; and as it is our wish that the undertaking 
which has been begun by you, be with the help 
of God, carried on and accomplished, and as we 
desire to see you immediately, we request there- 
fore that you will use all possible speed in hast- 
ening to us, that all necessary preparations may be 
made without delay. And as the season is early, 
and favorable for your return to the countries 
you have discovered, we wish you to ascertain 
whether measures cannot be taken at Seville or 
other places, necessary to that end. We request 
you to write by the courier who brings you this, 
.and who returns immediately, that the whole 
may be arranged by the time you return thither 
from us. 

Barcelorm, March 30/A, 1493. 

I THE KING. 
I THE QUEEN. 

By order of the King and Queen, 

FERNAND ALVAREZ. 







' „ 



^> v ■> 'V s * 

^ <^ x *£»<£> 

z - < 

- ^j 

*>* ^ 
o 










O. 









V 



■-ir. 

'' ^ A x 

•c o x : . - ^ v : 

.^ X ^ * : ■ "^, *,,!- ^ 

C- V 



^ *•■ >» / »♦, e.. '°/. *..-** \ x> 



<* \' X ""^ ' 



\d. xy < ■' o * v. * a 

G - x >->;-, ' V .: " X 









k v 



'%/ 



■/■ 







^ < 



rP v s 












W 
















-IE 'TO 7 ! BOUND TO PLEASE 

JedmM ftudwfmc 

Sr tfAl 

^NP' N. MANCHESTER, 
ksk^U INDIANA 







